Cisco Systems Network Card NPE 175 User Manual

Network Processing Engine and Network

Services Engine Installation and

Configuration

Product Number: NPE-100=, NPE-150=, NPE-175=, NPE-200=, NPE-225=,

NPE-300=, NPE-400=, NSE-1=, NPE-G1=, UBR7200-NPE-G1=, NPE-G2=,

UBR7200-NPE-G2=

See the product chapters for the platforms supported.

Americas Headquarters

Cisco Systems, Inc.

170 West Tasman Drive

San Jose, CA 95134-1706

USA

http://www.cisco.com

Tel: 408 526-4000

800 553-NETS (6387)

Fax: 408 527-0883

Customer Order Number:

Text Part Number: OL-4448-12

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C O N T E N T S

Preface

Document Revision History i-i

Objectives i-ii

Organization i-ii

Related Documentation

Your router and the Cisco IOS software running on it contain extensive features and functionality, which

are documented in the following resources:

•

Cisco IOS software:

For configuration information and support, refer to the modular configuration and modular

command reference publications in the Cisco IOS software configuration documentation set that

corresponds to the software release installed on your Cisco hardware.

Note

You can access Cisco IOS software configuration and hardware installation and

maintenance documentation on the World Wide Web at http://www.cisco.com. Translated

documentation is available at http://www.cisco.com/public/countries_languages.shtml.

•

For the NPE-G1, see the NPE-G1 Read Me First document, which is available at the following URL:

http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/cable/cmts/ubr7200/ubr7246vxr/upgrade/guide/15066R.html

For the Cisco uBR7200-NPE-G1, see the Cisco uBR7200-NPE-G1 Read Me First document, which

is available at the following URL:

http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/cable/cmts/ubr7200/ubr7246vxr/upgrade/guide/15066R.html

For information on the Cisco 7200 series routers, refer to the following publications:

•

Your Cisco 7200 series routers contain extensive features and functionality, which are documented in the

following resources:

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

iii

Preface

Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request

•

Cisco 7200 Series Routers Documentation Roadmap at

http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/routers/7200/roadmaps/7200_series_doc_roadmap/3512.html

for a list of all Cisco 7200 series routers documentation and troubleshooting tools and information.

Cisco 7200 Series Routers Port Adapter Documentation Roadmap at

http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/routers/7200/roadmaps/7200_series_port_adapter_doc_roadma

p/3530.html for a list of all Cisco 7200 series routers-supported port adapter documentation.

Cisco 7200 Series Routers Troubleshooting Documentation Roadmap at

http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/routers/7200/roadmaps/7200_series_trblshoot_doc_roadmap/35

18.htmll for links to troubleshooting tools, utilities, and Tech Notes.

For information about the Cisco uBR7200 series routers, refer to the following publications:

–

Cisco uBR7200 Series Universal Broadband Router Hardware Installation Guide at:

http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/cable/cmts/ubr7200/installation/guide/ub72khig.html

–

Cisco uBR7200 Series Configuration Notes at:

http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/cable/ps2217/products_installation_and_configurati

on_guides_list.html

•

For information about the Cisco AS5800 Universal Access Server, refer to the following

publications:

–

Cisco AS5800 Universal Access Server Hardware Installation Guide at:

http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/routers/access/as5800/hardware/installation/guide/5800_hi

g.html

–

Cisco AS5800 Universal Access Server Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information at:

http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/univgate/ps509/products_regulatory_approvals_and

_compliance09186a00800c9843.html

•

To view Cisco documentation or obtain general information about the documentation, refer to the

following sources:

–

“Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request” section on page iv

Cisco Information Packet that shipped with your router or switch

Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request

For information on obtaining documentation, submitting a service request, and gathering additional

information, see the monthly What’s New in Cisco Product Documentation, which also lists all new and

revised Cisco technical documentation, at:

http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/general/whatsnew/whatsnew.html

Subscribe to the What’s New in Cisco Product Documentation as a Really Simple Syndication (RSS) feed

and set content to be delivered directly to your desktop using a reader application. The RSS feeds are a free

service and Cisco currently supports RSS version 2.0.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C H A P T E R

NPE-100, NPE-150, and NPE-200 Overview

This chapter describes the network processing engine (NPE) models NPE-100, NPE-150, and NPE-200

and contains the following sections:

•

Supported Platforms, page 1-1

Software Requirements, page 1-1

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

1-1

Chapter 1 NPE-100, NPE-150, and NPE-200 Overview

NPE-100, NPE-150, and NPE-200 Description and Overview

•

The network processing engine maintains and executes the system management functions for the

Cisco uBR7200 series routers.

The NPE also shares the system memory and environmental monitoring functions with the I/O

controller.

Components

Figure 1-1

NPE-100

U12

U25

U18

NETWORK PROCESSING ENGINE-100

System controller

R4700 microprocessor

Captive installation screw

Handle

Midplane connectors

Temperature sensor

DRAM SIMMs

Bank 1

Temperature sensor

10 Bank 0

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

1-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 NPE-100, NPE-150, and NPE-200 Overview

NPE-100, NPE-150, and NPE-200 Description and Overview

Figure 1-2

NPE-150

U12

U25

U18

NETWORK PROCESSING ENGINE-150

System controller

Midplane connectors

Temperature sensor

DRAM SIMMs

R4700 microprocessor

1-MB SRAM (U700 through U703 and

U800 through U803)

Captive installation screw

Handle

10 Bank 1

11 Bank 0

Temperature sensor

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

1-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 NPE-100, NPE-150, and NPE-200 Overview

NPE-100, NPE-150, and NPE-200 Description and Overview

Figure 1-3

NPE-200

U52

U42

U25

U11

NETWORK PROCESSING ENGINE-200

System controller

Midplane connectors

Temperature sensor

Boot ROM U92

R5000 microprocessor

4-MB SRAM (U6, U10, U13, U14, U28, U29,

U38, and U39)

Captive installation screw

Handle

10 DRAM SIMMs

11 Bank 1

Temperature sensor

12 Bank 0

The NPE-100, NPE-150, and NPE-200 consist of the following components:

•

Reduced instruction set computing (RISC) microprocessor

–

The NPE-100 and NPE-150 have an R4700 microprocessor that operates at an internal clock

speed of 150 MHz.

–

The NPE-200 has an R5000 microprocessor that operates at an internal clock speed of

200 MHz.

•

System controller

The system controller provides hardware logic to interconnect the processor, DRAM, and the

PCI-based system backplane bus. The NPE-150 and NPE-200 have a system controller that uses

direct memory access (DMA) to transfer data between DRAM and packet SRAM on the network

processing engine.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

1-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 NPE-100, NPE-150, and NPE-200 Overview

NPE-100, NPE-150, and NPE-200 Description and Overview

•

Upgradable memory modules

The NPE-100, NPE-150, and NPE-200 use DRAM for storing routing tables, network accounting

applications, packets of information in preparation for process switching, and packet buffering for

SRAM overflow (except in the NPE-100, which contains no packet SRAM). The standard

configuration is 32 MB, with up to 128 MB available through single in-line memory module

(SIMM) upgrades.

•

Packet SRAM for storing data packets

–

The NPE-100 does not have packet SRAM.

The NPE-150 has 1 MB of SRAM.

The NPE-200 has 4 MB of SRAM.

Cache memory

The NPE-100, NPE-150, and NPE-200 have unified cache SRAM that functions as the secondary

cache for the microprocessor. (The primary cache is within the microprocessor.)

•

Two environmental sensors for monitoring the cooling air as it leaves the chassis

Boot ROM for storing sufficient code for booting the Cisco IOS software on the NPE-200

Note

The NPE-100 and NPE-150 use the boot ROM on the I/O controller.

System Management Functions

The network processing engines perform the following system management functions:

•

Sending and receiving routing protocol updates

Managing tables, caches, and buffers

Monitoring interface and environmental status

Providing Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) management through the console and

Telnet interface

•

Accounting for and switching of data traffic

Booting and reloading images

Managing port adapters (including recognition and initialization during online insertion and

removal)

Terms and Acronyms

•

Cache—Memory with fast access and small capacity used to temporarily store recently accessed

data; found either incorporated into the processor or near it.

•

DIMM—dual in-line memory module

DRAM—dynamic random-access memory

Instruction and data cache—Instructions to the processor, and data on which the instructions work.

Integrated cache—Cache that is built into the processor; sometimes referred to as internal cache.

Cache memory physically located outside the processor is not integrated, and is sometimes referred

to as external cache.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

1-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 NPE-100, NPE-150, and NPE-200 Overview

NPE-100, NPE-150, and NPE-200 Memory Information

•

OTP—one time programmable

Primary, secondary, tertiary cache—Hierarchical cache memory storage based on the proximity of

the cache to the core of the processor. Primary cache is closest to the processor core and has the

fastest access. Secondary cache has slower access than primary cache, but faster access than tertiary

cache.

•

RAM—random-access memory

RISC—reduced instruction set computing

ROM—read-only memory

SIMM—single in-line memory module

SDRAM—synchronous dynamic random-access memory

SDRAM-fixed—SDRAM of a fixed size or quantity; can be replaced, but not upgraded

SODIMM—small outline dual in-line memory module

SRAM—static random-access memory

Unified cache—Instruction cache and data cache are combined. For example, a processor may have

primary cache with separate instruction and data cache memory, but unified secondary cache.

NPE-100, NPE-150, and NPE-200 Memory Information

To determine the memory configuration of your NPE, use the show version command.

The following example shows an NPE-150 installed in a Cisco 7206 router:

router(boot)# show version

Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software

IOS (tm) 7200 Software (C7200-J-M), Released Version 11.1(17)CA

Compiled Sun 21-Apr-96 04:10

Image text-base:0x60010890, data-base:0x605F0000

(display text omitted)

cisco 7206 (NPE150) processor with 12288K/4096K bytes of memory.

R4700 processor, Implementation 33, Rev 1.0, (Level 2 Cache)

Last reset from power-on

(display text omitted)

Use the following sections for information about memory specifications and configurations for the

NPE-100, NPE-150, and NPE-200.

Note

To prevent DRAM errors in the NPE-100, NPE-150, or NPE-200, and to ensure that your system

initializes correctly at startup, DRAM bank 0 (socket U18 and U25, or U11 and U25) must contain no

fewer than two SIMMs of the same type. You may also install two SIMMs of the same type in bank 1

(socket U4 and U12, or U42 and U52); however, bank 0 must always contain the two largest SIMMs.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

1-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 NPE-100, NPE-150, and NPE-200 Overview

NPE-100, NPE-150, and NPE-200 Memory Information

NPE-100 Memory Information

Table 1-1 provides information about memory specifications. Table 1-2 provides memory configurations

for the NPE-100.

Table 1-1

NPE-100 Memory Specifications

Component Location on

the NPE-100 Baord

Memory Type

Size

Quantity

Description

DRAM

32 to 128 MB

2 to 4

16- or 32-MB SIMMs (based on

maximum DRAM required)

Bank 0: U18 and U25

Bank 1: U4 and U12

Primary cache

—

R4700 processor, internal cache

U201

Secondary cache

512 KB

R4700 processor, unified, external cache U2, U10, U14, and U26

Table 1-2

NPE-100 DRAM SIMM Configurations—Configurable Memory Only

Total DRAM¹

32 MB

Bank 0

Quantity - Bank 0

Bank 1

Quantity - Bank 1

Product Number

MEM-NPE-32MB²

MEM-NPE-64MB²

U18 and U25

2 16-MB SIMMs²U4 and U12

2 32-MB SIMMs U4 and U12

—

64 MB

—

128 MB

2 32-MB SIMMs MEM-NPE-128MB²

1. Refer to the Cisco AS5800 Universal Access Server documentation listed in the “Related Documentation” section on page iii for Cisco AS5800

Universal Access Server DRAM options.

2. These products are also available as DRAM upgrades. For example, to upgrade a network processing engine from 32 MB to 64 MB of DRAM, order

Product Number MEM-NPE-64MB=.

NPE-150 Memory Information

Table 1-3 provides information about memory specifications. Table 1-4 provides memory configurations

for the NPE-150.

Table 1-3

NPE-150 Memory Specifications

Component Location on the

NPE-150 Board

Memory Type

Size

Quantity

Description

DRAM

32 to 128 MB 2 to 4

16- or 32-MB SIMMs (based on maximum Bank 0: U18 and U2

DRAM required)

Bank 1: U4 and U12

SRAM

1 MB

—

8 chips, each being 128K x 9 bits wide

U700 through U703

U800 through U803

Primary cache

—

R4700 processor, internal cache

U201

Secondary cache 512 MB

R4700 processor, unified, external cache

U2, U10, U14, and U26

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

1-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 NPE-100, NPE-150, and NPE-200 Overview

NPE-100, NPE-150, and NPE-200 Memory Information

Table 1-4

NPE-150 DRAM SIMM Configurations—Configurable Memory Only

Total DRAM¹

32 MB

Bank 0

Quantity - Bank 0

2 16-MB SIMMs

2 32-MB SIMMs

Bank 1

Quantity - Bank 1

Product Number

MEM-NPE-32 MB²

MEM-NPE-64MB²

U18 and U25

U4 and U12

—

64 MB

—

128 MB

2 32-MB SIMMs MEM-NPE-128MB²

1. Refer to the Cisco AS5800 Universal Access Server documentation listed in the “Related Documentation” section on page iii for Cisco AS5800

Universal Access Server DRAM options.

2. These products are also available as DRAM upgrades. For example, to upgrade a network processing engine from 32 MB to 64 MB of DRAM, order

Product Number MEM-NPE-64MB=.

NPE-200 Memory Information

Table 1-5 provides information about memory specifications. Table 1-6 provides memory configurations

for the NPE-200.

Table 1-5

NPE-200 Memory Specifications

Component Location on the

NPE-200 Board

Memory Type

Size

Quantity

Description

DRAM

32 to 128 MB 2 to 4

16- or 32-MB SIMMs (based on

maximum DRAM required)

Bank 0: U11 and U25

Bank 1: U42 and U52

SRAM

4 MB

8 chips, each being 512K x 8 bits wide U6, U10, U13, U14, U28, U29,

U38, and U39

Boot ROM

256 KB

EPROM for the ROM monitor

programs

U92

Primary cache

—

R5000 processor, internal cache

U44

Secondary cache

512 KB

R5000 processor, unified, external

cache

U16, U9, U109, and U107

Table 1-6

NPE-200 DRAM SIMM Configurations—Configurable Memory Only

Total DRAM¹

32 MB

Bank 0

Quantity - Bank 0

Bank 1

Quantity - Bank 1

Product Number

MEM-NPE-32MB²

MEM-NPE-64MB²

U11 and U25

2 16-MB SIMMs U42 and U52

2 32-MB SIMMs U42 and U52

—

64 MB

—

128 MB

2 32-MB SIMMs MEM-NPE-128MB²

1. Refer to the Cisco AS5800 Universal Access Server documentation listed in the “Related Documentation” section on page iii for Cisco AS5800

Universal Access Server DRAM options.

2. These products are also available as DRAM upgrades. For example, to upgrade a network processing engine from 32 MB to 64 MB of DRAM, order

Product Number MEM-NPE-64MB=.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

1-8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C H A P T E R

NPE-175 and NPE-225 Overview

This chapter describes the network processing engine (NPE) models NPE-175 and NPE-225 and

contains the following sections:

•

Supported Platforms, page 2-1

Software Requirements, page 2-1

NPE-175 and NPE-225 Description and Overview, page 2-1

NPE-175 and NPE-225 Memory Information, page 2-5

Supported Platforms

The following NPEs support the Cisco 7200 series routers and Cisco 7200 VXR routers:

NPE-175

NPE-225

•

The following NPEs support the Cisco uBR7246VXR universal broadband router, Cisco uBR7246, and

Cisco uBR7223 universal broadband routers:

•

NPE-175

NPE-225

Software Requirements

For minimum software release information, see the “Software Requirements” section on page 8-4.

NPE-175 and NPE-225 Description and Overview

This section contains information about the network processing engine components and the system

management functions. The network processing engine maintains and executes the system management

functions for the Cisco 7200 series and Cisco uBR7200 series routers. The NPE also shares the system

memory and environmental monitoring functions with the I/O controller.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

2-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2 NPE-175 and NPE-225 Overview

NPE-175 and NPE-225 Description and Overview

Components

Figure 2-1

NPE-175

NETWORK PROCESSING ENGINE-150

Network controller board

System controller

Handle

Midplane connectors

Boot ROM (U1)

Processor engine board

Captive installation screw

RM5270 microprocessor

Temperature sensor

10 SDRAM DIMM (U15)

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

2-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2 NPE-175 and NPE-225 Overview

NPE-175 and NPE-225 Description and Overview

Figure 2-2

NPE-225

NETWORK PROCESSING ENGINE-200

Network controller board

System controller

Handle

Midplane connectors

Boot ROM (U1)

Processor engine board

Captive installation screw

RM5271 microprocessor

Temperature sensor

10 SDRAM DIMM (U15)

The NPE-175 and NPE-225 consist of the following components:

•

Reduced instruction set computing (RISC) microprocessor

–

The NPE-175 has an RM5270 microprocessor that operates at an internal clock speed of

200 MHz.

–

The NPE-225 has an RM5271 microprocessor that operates at an internal clock speed of

262 MHz.

•

System controller

The system controller provides hardware logic to interconnect the processor, DRAM, and the

PCI-based system backplane bus. The NPE-175 and NPE-225 have one system controller that

provides processor access to the two midplane and single I/O controller peripheral component

interconnect (PCI) buses. The system controller also allows port adapters—on either of the two

midplane PCI buses—access to SDRAM.

•

Upgradable memory modules

The NPE-175 and NPE-225 use SDRAM for providing code, data, and packet storage.

Cache memory

The NPE-175 and NPE-225 have unified cache SRAM that functions as the secondary cache for the

microprocessor. (The primary cache is within the microprocessor.)

•

Two environmental sensors for monitoring the cooling air as it leaves the chassis

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

2-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2 NPE-175 and NPE-225 Overview

NPE-175 and NPE-225 Description and Overview

•

Boot ROM for storing sufficient code for booting the Cisco IOS software; the NPE-175 and

NPE-225 have boot ROM

Note

Neither the NPE-175 nor the NPE-225 has packet SRAM.

System Management Functions

The network processing engines perform the following system management functions:

•

Sending and receiving routing protocol updates

Managing tables, caches, and buffers

Monitoring interface and environmental status

Providing Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) management through the console and

Telnet interface

•

Accounting for and switching of data traffic

Booting and reloading images

Managing port adapters (including recognition and initialization during online insertion and

removal)

Terms and Acronyms

•

Cache—Memory with fast access and small capacity used to temporarily store recently accessed

data; found either incorporated into the processor or near it.

•

DIMM—dual in-line memory module

DRAM—dynamic random-access memory

Instruction and data cache—Instructions to the processor, and data on which the instructions work.

Integrated cache—Cache that is built into the processor; sometimes referred to as internal cache.

Cache memory physically located outside the processor is not integrated, and is sometimes referred

to as external cache.

•

OTP—one time programmable

Primary, secondary, tertiary cache—Hierarchical cache memory storage based on the proximity of

the cache to the core of the processor. Primary cache is closest to the processor core and has the

fastest access. Secondary cache has slower access than primary cache, but faster access than tertiary

cache.

•

RAM—random-access memory

RISC—reduced instruction set computing

ROM—read-only memory

SIMM—single in-line memory module

SDRAM—synchronous dynamic random-access memory

SDRAM-fixed—SDRAM of a fixed size or quantity; can be replaced, but not upgraded

SODIMM—small outline dual in-line memory module

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

2-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2 NPE-175 and NPE-225 Overview

NPE-175 and NPE-225 Memory Information

•

SRAM—static random-access memory

Unified cache— Instruction cache and data cache are combined. For example, a processor may have

primary cache with separate instruction and data cache memory, but unified secondary cache.

NPE-175 and NPE-225 Memory Information

To determine the memory configuration of your NPE, use the show version command.

The following example shows an NPE-225 installed in a Cisco 7206VXR router:

router(boot)# show version

Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software

IOS (tm) 7200 Software (C7200-BOOT-M), Released Version 12.0(19990124:222541)

[biff-nightly 115]

Compiled Mon 15-Feb-99 21:50 by biff

Image text-base:0x600088F8, data-base:0x6064C000

(display text omitted)

cisco 7206VXR (NPE225) processor with 57344K/8192K bytes of memory.

R527x CPU at 262Mhz, Implementation 40, Rev 10.0, 2048KB L2 Cache

6 slot VXR midplane, Version 2.0

(display text omitted)

Table 2-1 provides memory specifications, Table 2-2 provides memory configurations for the NPE-175,

and Table 2-3 provides memory configurations for the NPE-225.

Table 2-1

NPE-175 and NPE-225 Memory Specifications

Component

Location on the

NPE-175 and

NPE-225 Board

Memory Type

Size

Quantity

Description

SDRAM

64 or 128 MB

1 configurable

bank with 1

DIMM

U15

SDRAM slot

Boot ROM

512 KB

OTP ROM for the ROM monitor

program

Primary cache

16 KB (instruction),

16 KB (data)

—

RM5270 processor, primary internal

cache

32 KB (instruction),

32 KB (data)

RM5271 processor, primary internal

cache

Secondary cache 2 MB

4 x 256 x 18 bits = RM527x processor, unified external

U5, U6, U7, U8¹

64 bit plus 4 parity cache

bits

1. Located on the processor engine board.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

2-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2 NPE-175 and NPE-225 Overview

NPE-175 and NPE-225 Memory Information

Table 2-2

NPE-175 SDRAM DIMM Configurations—Configurable Memory Only

Total SDRAM

64 MB

Bank

U15

Quantity

Product Number

1 64-MB DIMM

1 128-MB DIMM

MEM-SD-NPE-64MB

MEM-SD-NPE-128MB

128 MB

Table 2-3

NPE-225 SDRAM DIMM Configurations—Configurable Memory Only

Total SDRAM

64 MB

Bank

U15

Quantity

Product Number

1 64-MB DIMM

1 128-MB DIMM

1 256-MB DIMM

MEM-SD-NPE-64MB

MEM-SD-NPE-128MB

MEM-SD-NSE-256MB

128 MB

256 MB

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

2-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C H A P T E R

NPE-300 and NPE-400 Overview

This chapter describes the network processing engine (NPE) models NPE-300 and NPE-400 and

contains the following sections:

•

Supported Platforms, page 3-1

Software Requirements, page 3-1

NPE-300 and NPE-400 Description and Overview, page 3-2

NPE-300 and NPE-400 Memory Information, page 3-5

Supported Platforms

The following NPEs support the Cisco 7200 VXR routers:

NPE-300

NPE-400

The following NPEs support the Cisco uBR7246VXR universal broadband router:

•

NPE-300

NPE-400

The following NPEs support the Cisco 7206VXR as a router shelf in the Cisco AS5800 Universal Access

Router:

•

NPE-300

NPE-400

These NPEs are keyed to prevent insertion in the Cisco 7200 series routers (7202, 7204, 7206).

Software Requirements

For minimum software release information, see the “Software Requirements” section on page 8-4.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

3-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 NPE-300 and NPE-400 Overview

NPE-300 and NPE-400 Description and Overview

This section contains information about the network processing engine components and the system

management functions. The network processing engine maintains and executes the system management

functions for the routers. It also shares the system memory and environmental monitoring functions with

the I/O controller.

Components

Figure 3-1

NPE-300

NETWORK PROCESSING ENGINE-300

9 10

Midplane connectors

Keying post

RM7000 microprocessor

10 Temperature sensor (U42)

11 Keying post

DIMM 3 (U44)

Bank 1 (user configurable)

DIMM 2 (U45)

12 Temperature sensor (U41)

13 Boot ROM (U1)

Captive installation screw

Handle

14 DIMM 0 (U16)

15 Bank 0 (fixed)

System controllers

16 U15 (never populated)

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

3-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 NPE-300 and NPE-400 Overview

NPE-300 and NPE-400 Description and Overview

Figure 3-2

NPE-400

NETWORK PROCESSING ENGINE-400

Temperature sensor (U31)

Keying post

Midplane connectors

Boot ROM (U7)

RM7000 microprocessor

System controller

Captive installation screw

Handle

Temperature sensor (U6)

10 SODIMM (J1)

11 Standoff and screw

The network processing engines consist of the following components:

•

Reduced instruction set computing (RISC) microprocessor

–

The NPE-300 uses an RM7000 microprocessor that operates at an internal clock speed of

262 MHz.

–

The NPE-400 uses an RM7000 microprocessor that operates at an internal clock speed of

350 MHz.

•

System controller

The system controller provides hardware logic to interconnect the processor, DRAM, and the

PCI-based system backplane bus.

–

The NPE-300 has two system controllers that provide processor access to the midplane and

single I/O controller PCI buses. The system controllers also allow port adapters access to

SDRAM using any of the three PCI buses.

–

The NPE-400 has a single system controller that provides system access.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

3-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 NPE-300 and NPE-400 Overview

NPE-300 and NPE-400 Description and Overview

•

Upgradable memory modules

The NPE-300 and NPE-400 use SDRAM for storing all packets received or sent from network

interfaces. The SDRAM also stores routing tables and network accounting applications.

–

On the NPE-300, two independent SDRAM memory arrays in the system allow concurrent

access by port adapters and the processor; however, only one is upgradable.

–

On the NPE-400, one memory array is shared by port adapters and the processor.

•

Cache memory

The NPE-300 and NPE-400 have cache SRAM that functions as the tertiary cache for the

microprocessor.

•

Two environmental sensors for monitoring the cooling air as it leaves the chassis for both the

NPE-300 and NPE-400

Boot ROM for storing sufficient code for booting the Cisco IOS software

Note

The NPE-300 and the NPE-400 do not have packet SRAM.

System Management Functions

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

3-4

Chapter 3 NPE-300 and NPE-400 Overview

NPE-300 and NPE-400 Memory Information

•

Primary, secondary, tertiary cache—Hierarchical cache memory storage based on the proximity of

the cache to the core of the processor. Primary cache is closest to the processor core and has the

fastest access. Secondary cache has slower access than primary cache, but faster access than tertiary

cache.

•

RAM—random-access memory

RISC—reduced instruction set computing

ROM—read-only memory

SIMM—single in-line memory module

SDRAM—synchronous dynamic random-access memory

SDRAM-fixed—SDRAM of a fixed size or quantity; can be replaced, but not upgraded

SODIMM—small outline dual in-line memory module

SRAM—static random-access memory

Unified cache—Instruction cache and data cache are combined. For example, a processor may have

primary cache with separate instruction and data cache memory, but unified secondary cache.

NPE-300 and NPE-400 Memory Information

To determine the memory configuration of your NPE-300, use the show version command.

The following example of the show version command shows an NPE-300 installed in a Cisco 7206VXR

router:

Router# show version

Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software

IOS (tm) 7200 Software (C7200-JS-M), Released Version 12.0(19980705:021501)

Compiled Tue 25-Aug-98 04:01 by biff

Image text-base: 0x600088C4, data-base: 0x60FA6000

(display text omitted)

cisco 7206VXR (NPE300) processor with 44x1024K/20480K bytes of memory.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

3-5

Chapter 3 NPE-300 and NPE-400 Overview

NPE-300 and NPE-400 Memory Information

cisco 7206VXR (NPE400) processor (revision 0xFF) with 122880K/8192K bytes

of memory.

Processor board ID 8771013

R7000 CPU at 350Mhz, Implementation 39, Rev 2.1, 256KB L2, 4096KB L3 Cache

6 slot VXR midplane, Version 2.1

(display text omitted)

Table 3-1 provides memory specifications, and Table 3-2 provides user replaceable memory

configurations for the NPE-300. Table 3-3 provides memory specifications, and Table 3-4 provides

memory configurations for the NPE-400.

Table 3-1

NPE-300 Memory Specifications

Component Location

on the NPE-300 Board

Memory Type

Size

Quantity

Description

SDRAM-configurable 32 to 256 MB 1 configurable

32-, 64-, or 128-MB DIMMs (based

on maximum SDRAM required)

Bank 1: U45 and U44

bank with

2 SDRAM slots

Boot ROM

512 KB

32 MB

OTP ROM for the ROM monitor

program

U1¹

SDRAM-fixed

Primary cache

32-MB DIMM

Bank 0²: U16

16 KB

—

RM7000 processor, integrated cache U49

(instruction),

16 KB (data)

Secondary cache

Tertiary cache

256 KB

(fixed)

—

RM7000 processor, unified, internal

cache

U49

2 MB (fixed)

RM7000 processor, external cache

U7, U8, U9, U10, U17

1. Located on the processor engine board.

2. Socket U15 is never populated, although it is part of bank 0.

Table

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

3-6

Chapter 3 NPE-300 and NPE-400 Overview

NPE-300 and NPE-400 Memory Information

Table 3-2

NPE-300 SDRAM DIMM Configurations—Configurable Memory Only (continued)

Total SDRAM¹

Bank 1²

Quantity

Product Number³

32 MB⁴+

128 MB

U45 and U44

U45

2 64-MB DIMMs or

1 128-MB DIMM

MEM-SD-NPE-64MB

MEM-SD-NPE-128MB

32 MB⁴+

256 MB

U45 and U44

2 128-MB DIMMs

MEM-SD-NPE-256MB

1. Refer to the Cisco AS5800 Universal Access Server documentation listed in the “Related Documentation” section on page iii for Cisco AS5800

Universal Access Server SDRAM options.

2. There are two user-upgradable SDRAM slots in bank 1. (Bank 0 is used exclusively for packet memory and is set at a fixed configuration of 32 MB in

the factory.)

3. These products are also available as SDRAM upgrades. To order an upgrade, add an equal sign (=) after the product number, for example,

MEM-SD-NPE-128MB=.

4. This 32 MB is fixed memory in SDRAM bank 0, socket U16. Socket U15 is never populated.

Table 3-3

NPE-400 Memory Specifications

Component

Location on the

NPE-400 Board

Memory Type

Size

Quantity Description

SDRAM-configurable

Boot ROM

128, 256, or 512 MB

512 KB

128-, 256- or 512-MB SODIMM

OTP ROM for the ROM monitor program

RM7000 processor, integrated cache

U38

Primary cache

16 KB (instruction),

16 KB (data)

—

Secondary cache

Tertiary cache

256 KB (fixed)

4 MB (fixed)

—

RM7000 processor, unified, internal cache

RM7000 processor, external cache

U38

U2, U26, U27,

U28, U37

Table 3-4

NPE-400 Memory Configuration

Total SDRAM

128 MB

Bank 1

Quantity

Product Number

MEM-NPE-400-128MB

1 128-MB SODIMM

1 256-MB SODIMM

1 512-MB SODIMM

256 MB

MEM-NPE-400-256MB

MEM-NPE-400-512MB

512 MB

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

3-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 NPE-300 and NPE-400 Overview

NPE-300 and NPE-400 Memory Information

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

3-8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C H A P T E R

NSE-1 Overview

This chapter describes the network services engine (NSE-1) and contains the following sections:

•

Supported Platforms, page 4-1

Software Requirements, page 4-1

NSE-1 Description and Overview, page 4-1

NSE-1 Memory Information, page 4-4

For NSE-1 configuration and PXF troubleshooting information including NSE-1-specific show and

debug commands, see Chapter 10, “Configuration Tasks and Troubleshooting Information.”

Supported Platforms

The NSE-1 is supported only in the Cisco 7200 VXR routers. The NSE-1 is not supported in the

Cisco uBR7200 VXR series routers.

Software Requirements

For minimum software release information, see the “Software Requirements” section on page 8-4.

NSE-1 Description and Overview

This section contains information about the network services engine components and the system

management functions. The network services engine maintains and executes the system management

functions for the Cisco 7200 VXR routers. The NSE-1 also shares the system memory and

environmental monitoring functions with the I/O controller. Its performance is greater than that of the

network processing engines because of the Parallel eXpress Forwarding (PXF) processor. The PXF

processor works with the routing processor to provide accelerated packet switching, as well as

accelerated IP Layer 3 feature processing.

The NSE-1 consists of two modular boards: the processor engine board and the network controller board.

It is keyed so that it can be used only in the Cisco 7200 VXR routers.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

4-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 NSE-1 Overview

NSE-1 Description and Overview

Note

The NSE-1 is not supported in the Cisco uBR7200 VXR series routers, even though it is physically

capable of being inserted into the routers.

Components

Figure 4-1

NSE-1

NETWORK PROCESSING ENGINE-200

Network controller board

Keying post

Midplane connectors

Boot ROM (U1)

System controller

Processor engine board

Captive installation screw

RM7000 microprocessor

Handle

10 Temperature sensor

11 SDRAM DIMM (U15)

12 Parallel eXpress Forwarding (PXF) processor

13 Temperature sensor

The NSE-1 consists of the following components:

•

Reduced instruction set computing (RISC) microprocessor

The NSE-1 uses an RM7000 microprocessor that operates at an internal clock speed of 262 MHz.

Parallel eXpress Forwarding processor

•

The Parallel eXpress Forwarding (PXF) processor enables parallel IP multipacket processing

functions, working with the routing processor to provide accelerated packet switching, as well as

accelerated IP Layer 3 feature processing.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

4-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 NSE-1 Overview

NSE-1 Description and Overview

•

System controller

The system controller provides hardware logic to interconnect the processor, DRAM, and the

PCI-based system backplane bus. The NSE-1 has one system controller that provides processor

access to the two midplane and single I/O controller PCI buses. The system controller also allows

port adapters—on either of the two midplane PCI buses—access to SDRAM.

•

Upgradable memory modules

The NSE-1 uses SDRAM for providing code, data, and packet storage.

Cache memory

The NSE-1 has three levels of cache: primary and secondary cache that are internal to the

microprocessor with secondary unified cache for data and instruction, and tertiary, 2-MB external

cache.

•

Two environmental sensors for monitoring the cooling air as it leaves the chassis

Boot ROM for storing sufficient code for booting the Cisco IOS software

Note

The NSE-1 does not have packet SRAM.

System Management Functions

The NSE-1 performs the following system management functions:

•

Sending and receiving routing protocol updates

Managing tables, caches, and buffers

Monitoring interface and environmental status

Providing Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) management through the console and

Telnet interface

•

Accounting for and switching of data traffic

Booting and reloading images

Managing port adapters (including recognition and initialization during online insertion and

removal)

Terms and Acronyms

•

Cache—Memory with fast access and small capacity used to temporarily store recently accessed

data; found either incorporated into the processor or near it.

•

DIMM—dual in-line memory module

DRAM—dynamic random-access memory

Instruction and data cache—Instructions to the processor, and data on which the instructions work.

Integrated cache—Cache that is built into the processor; sometimes referred to as internal cache.

Cache memory physically located outside the processor is not integrated, and is sometimes referred

to as external cache.

•

OTP—one time programmable

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

4-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 NSE-1 Overview

NSE-1 Memory Information

•

Primary, secondary, tertiary cache—Hierarchical cache memory storage based on the proximity of

the cache to the core of the processor. Primary cache is closest to the processor core and has the

fastest access. Secondary cache has slower access than primary cache, but faster access than tertiary

cache.

•

RAM—random-access memory

RISC—reduced instruction set computing

ROM—read-only memory

SIMM—single in-line memory module

SDRAM—synchronous dynamic random-access memory

SDRAM-fixed—SDRAM of a fixed size or quantity; can be replaced, but not upgraded

SODIMM—small outline dual in-line memory module

SRAM—static random-access memory

Unified cache—Instruction cache and data cache are combined. For example, a processor may have

primary cache with separate instruction and data cache memory, but unified secondary cache.

NSE-1 Memory Information

To determine the memory configuration of your NSE-1, use the show version command.

The following example shows an NSE-1 installed in a Cisco 7206VXR router:

Router# show version

Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software

IOS (tm) 7200 Software (C7200-P-M), Released Version 12.0

Compiled Wed 22-Dec-99 08:37 by

Image text-base:0x60008900, data-base:0x60B58000

(display text omitted)

cisco 7206VXR NSE-1 processor with 57344K/8192K bytes of memory.

R7000 CPU at 262Mhz, Implementation 39, Rev 1.0, 256KB L2 Cache

6 slot VXR midplane, Version 2.0

(display text omitted)

Table 4-1 provides memory specifications and Table 4-2 provides user replaceable memory

configuration information for the NSE-1.

Table 4-1

NSE-1 Memory Specifications

Component Location

on the NSE-1 Board

Memory Type

SDRAM

Size

Quantity

Description

128 MB or 256 MB

512 KB

128-MB or 256-MB DIMMs

U15

Boot ROM

Primary cache

OTP¹ROM for the ROM monitor program U1

16 KB (instruction),

16 KB (data)

—

RM7000 processor, internal cache U22

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

4-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 NSE-1 Overview

NSE-1 Memory Information

Table 4-1

NSE-1 Memory Specifications (continued)

Component Location

on the NSE-1 Board

Memory Type

Size

Quantity

—

Description

Secondary cache

Tertiary cache

256 KB

2 MB (fixed)

RM7000 processor, internal, unified cache U22

RM7000 processor, external cache²

U7, U9, U12, U14,

—

U17

1. OTP = one time programmable

2. Located on the processor engine board.

Table 4-2

NSE-1 SDRAM DIMM Configurations—Configurable Memory Only

Total SDRAM

128 MB

SDRAM Bank

U15

Quantity

Product Number

1 128-MB DIMM

1 256-MB DIMM

MEM-SD-NPE-128MB

MEM-SD-NSE-256MB

256 MB

U15

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

4-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 NSE-1 Overview

NSE-1 Memory Information

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

4-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C H A P T E R

NPE-G1 Overview

This chapter describes the NPE-G1 and contains the following sections:

•

Supported Platforms, page 5-1

Software Requirements, page 5-1

NPE-G1 Description and Overview, page 5-2

NPE-G1 Memory Information, page 5-9

Connection Equipment and Specifications, page 5-10

Fiber Optic Cleaning Information, page 5-20

Caution

You must copy and save your running configuration file to a CompactFlash Disk, PC Card, or TFTP

server before you install the NPE-G1. For instructions on copying and saving your configuration file, see

the

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

5-1

Chapter 5 NPE-G1 Overview

NPE-G1 Description and Overview

This section contains information about the NPE-G1 components and the system management functions.

The NPE-G1 is the first net

processing engine for the Cisco 7200 VXR routers and Cisco uBR7200 series routers to provide the

functionality of both a network processing engine and I/O controller. If used without an I/O controller,

an I/O controller blank panel must be in place.

While its design provides I/O controller functionality, it can also work with any I/O controller supported

in the Cisco 7200 VXR routers and Cisco uBR7200 series routers. The NPE-G1, when installed with an

I/O controller, provides the bootflash and NVRAM that the Cisco IOS software uses to boot.

Note

An I/O controller can be used with the NPE-G1, but an I/O controller is not necessary for system

functionality. Installing an I/O controller in a chassis with the NPE-G1 activates the console and

auxiliary ports on the I/O controller and automatically disables the console and auxiliary ports on the

NPE-G1. However, you can still use the CompactFlash Disk slots and Ethernet ports on both the NPE-G1

and I/O controller when both cards are installed.

The NPE-G1 maintains and executes the system management functions for the Cisco 7200 VXR routers

and Cisco uBR7200 series routers and also holds the system memory and environmental monitoring

functions.

The NPE-G1 consists of one board with multiple interfaces. It can be used only in the Cisco 7200 VXR

routers and Cisco uBR7200 series routers.

Note

The Cisco 7200 VXR routers and Cisco uBR7200 series routers use different models of the NPE-G1

processor. For the Cisco 7200 VXR routers , order the NPE-G1 or NPE-G1= product. For the

Cisco uBR7200 series router, order the UBR7200-NPE-G1 or UBR7200-NPE-G1= product. The two

models of NPE-G1 have different labels and use different boot helper images, and they cannot be

interchanged between the Cisco 7200 VXR routers and Cisco uBR7200 series routers.

Bandwidth

The NPE-G1 uses no bandwidth points, and when used with any I/O controller, the I/O controller also

uses no bandwidth points. None of the Gigabit Ethernet interfaces on the NPE-G1 use bandwidth points.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

5-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 NPE-G1 Overview

NPE-G1 Description and Overview

Components

Figure 5-1 illustrates the NPE-G1 and its major components.

Figure 5-1 NPE-G1

NETWORK PROCESSING ENGINE

POWER

PAC

CONSOLE

AUX

Midplane connectors

Flash memory

Boot ROM

NVRAM

Temperature sensor

BCM1250 system

Keying post

SODIMM 2 (J4)

Temperature sensor

10 SODIMM 1 (J3)

The NPE-G1 consists of the following components:

•

BCM1250 system

–

Microprocessor operates at an internal clock speed of 700 MHz.

Hardware logic to interconnect the processor, double data rate synchronous dynamic

random-access memory (DDR-SDRAM), lightning data transport (LDT) bus, the generic PCI

bus, and three direct-interface Gigabit Ethernet interfaces.

•

Cache memory

The NPE-G1 has two levels of cache: primary and secondary cache that are internal to the

microprocessor with secondary unified cache for data and instruction.

•

The NPE-G1 uses DDR-SDRAM for providing code, data, and packet storage.

Two environmental sensors for monitoring the cooling air as it enters and leaves the chassis.

Full-feature I/O controller functionality

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

5-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 NPE-G1 Overview

NPE-G1 Description and Overview

–

Three Gigabit Ethernet interfaces (six ports: three GBIC [optical] and three RJ-45s [copper]).

Any three ports are available at the same time and are linked directly to the BCM1250 system;

therefore the interfaces are not charged bandwidth points.

–

CompactFlash Disk for storing the default Cisco IOS software image. The CompactFlash Disk

slot can be used whether or not an I/O controller is in the router.

Auxiliary port with full data terminal equipment (DTE) functionality. (Functional when an I/O

controller is not present. If an I/O controller is present, its auxiliary port is the default port.)

Console port with full data communications equipment (DCE) functionality. (Functional when

an I/O controller is not present. If an I/O controller is present, its console port is the default

port.)

–

Boot ROM for storing sufficient code for booting the Cisco IOS software.

Flash memory for storing the boot helper (boot loader) image. (The boot helper image comes

installed on the NPE-G1.) If an I/O controller is present, its flash memory is no longer available.

–

NVRAM for storing the system configuration and environmental monitoring logs. NVRAM

uses lithium batteries to maintain its contents when disconnected from power. If an I/O

controller is present, its NVRAM memory is no longer available.

–

Upgradable memory modules

Note

An I/O controller can be used with the NPE-G1, but an I/O controller is not necessary for

system functionality. Installing an I/O controller in a chassis with the NPE-G1 activates the

console and auxiliary ports on the I/O controller and automatically disables the console and

auxiliary ports on the NPE-G1. However, you can still use the CompactFlash Disk slots and

Ethernet ports on both the NPE-G1 and I/O controller when both cards are installed.

Interfaces and LEDs

Figure 5-2

NPE-G1 Interfaces

NETWORK PROCESSING ENGINE

S L OT

AC T I V E

CPU

RESET

POWER

COMPACT FLASH

CONSOLE

AUX

9 10

Fast Ethernet/Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 port 0/1 6 Gigabit Ethernet port 0/3

Gigabit Ethernet port 0/1 CPU Reset

Fast Ethernet/Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 port 0/2 8 CompactFlash Disk slot (disk2)

Gigabit Ethernet port 0/2 Console port

Fast Ethernet/Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 port 0/3 10 Auxiliary port

The three interfaces on the NPE-G1 consist of three Gigabit Interface Converter (GBIC) ports and three

10/100/1000 Fast Ethernet/Gigabit Ethernet ports. The rules for using these ports are:

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

5-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 NPE-G1 Overview

NPE-G1 Description and Overview

•

Only one port per interface can be used at any one time. For example, for interface

Gigabit Ethernet 0/1, either the RJ-45 port can be used or the GBIC port, but not both.

A total of three ports on any of the three interfaces (0/1, 0/2, or 0/3) can be used at any one time; for

example, 0/1 GBIC, 0/2 GBIC, and 0/3 RJ-45.

The port numbering for the interfaces on the NPE-G1 start with 0/1 and not with 0/0, as is typical

for other interface cards. This is to avoid conflicts with the Ethernet and FastEthernet ports on an

I/O controller, if it is also installed.

Figure 5-3

NPE-G1 LEDs

G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T 0 / 3

L I N K

NETW

ORK PR

OCESSING ENGINE

CPU

RESET

E N

R J 4 5

S L O

R X

C T I V E

G B I C

T X

COMP

CT FLASH

WER

CONSOLE

LED flashes when

there is traffic

No. LED Label

LED

Color

In the Power Up state, the LED is

LINK (Interfaces 0/1, 0/2, RJ-45 and GBIC ports Green

0/3)

On, indicating that a link has been No

established

EN (Enable) (Interfaces

0/1, 0/2, 0/3)

RJ-45 ports only

Green

On if the RJ-45 port is selected

Off if the GBIC port is selected

On when the slot is being used

On and stays on

—

SLOT ACTIVE

POWER ON

CompactFlash Disk

Power

Green

—

The NPE-G1 faceplate contains LEDs that indicate system and port status. The RJ-45 and GBIC ports

share the same LINK LED because only one of these ports per interface (0/1, 0/2, or 0/3) can be used at

any one time. The EN (Enable) LED is on if the RJ-45 port is in use.

The POWER ON LED is on whether or not an I/O controller is present in the router. The CompactFlash

Disk slot can be used whether or not an I/O controller is present in the router. The SLOT ACTIVE LED

is on only when the CompactFlash Disk slot is in use.

LEDs are either on or off. The LED state (on or off), not the color, determines the status of the

connection.

CompactFlash Disk

The NPE-G1 has one CompactFlash Disk slot that uses CompactFlash Disks. The device in this slot is

always addressed as disk2: when using Cisco IOS CLI commands.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

5-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 NPE-G1 Overview

NPE-G1 Description and Overview

CompactFlash Disks are smaller in size than Type 2 Flash Disks but provide the same Attachment (ATA)

interface and equivalent functionality. This interface complies with the ANSI ATA Interface Document

X3T13.1153 D Rev. 9 specification. CompactFlash Disks provide from 64 MB to 256 MB of storage

space.

The CompactFlash Disk has controller circuitry that allows it to emulate a hard disk and automatically

maps out bad blocks and performs automatic block erasure. The CompactFlash Disk also provides the

capability to allocate noncontiguous sectors, which eliminates the need for the squeeze command (which

was required with older-style linear flash memory cards to recover the space used by deleted files).

The CompactFlash Disk also supports the Cisco IOS File System feature, which provides a single

interface to all of the router’s file systems, including the Flash Disks and flash memory, as well as

network file systems such as File Transfer Protocol (FTP) and Trivial FTP (TFTP) servers.

To install a CompactFlash Disk in the CompactFlash Disk slot, complete the following steps.

Step 1

Step 2

Attach an ESD wrist or ankle strap, connecting the equipment end of the strap to an unfinished chassis

surface.

Orient the CompactFlash Disk so that its connector end faces the appropriate slot. (See 1 in Figure 5-4.)

Figure 5-4

Installing and Removing a CompactFlash Disk

NETW

ORK PR

OCESSING ENGINE - G2

NETW

ORK PR

OCESSING ENGINE - G2

NETW

ORK PR

OCESSING ENGINE - G2

FLA

LAS

Inserting the compact Flash Disk

Removing the CompactFlash Disk

Pressing the ejector button to release the

CompactFlash Disk

Step 3

Note

Carefully insert the CompactFlash Disk into the slot until it completely seats in the connector, and the

ejector button for the slot pops out toward you. (See 2 in Figure 5-4.)

The CompactFlash Disk is keyed and cannot be seated the wrong way. The ejector button does not pop

out if the CompactFlash Disk is not completely inserted.

]

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

5-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 NPE-G1 Overview

NPE-G1 Description and Overview

To remove a CompactFlash Disk from the CompactFlash Disk slot, complete the following steps:

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

Press the ejector button on the slot. (See 3 in Figure 5-4.)

Grasp the CompactFlash Disk and pull it from the slot.

Place the CompactFlash Disk in an antistatic bag.

Note

All CompactFlash Disks must be formatted before their initial use. CompactFlash Disks shipped with

the NPE-G1 are formatted at the factory, but spare memory cards are not formatted.

Summary of Important NPE-G1 Information

Caution

The NPE-G1 requires that you copy and save your running configuration file to a CompactFlash Disk,

PC Card, or TFTP server before you install the NPE-G1. For instructions on copying and saving your

configuration file, see the “Copying the Configuration File” section on page 7-4 in Chapter 7, “NPE-G1

and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information.”

For general preparation for installation instructions, see Chapter 8, “Preparation for Installation.” For

installation and configuration instructions specific to the NPE-G1, see Chapter 7, “NPE-G1 and NPE-G2

Installation and Configuration Information.”

•

The RJ-45 ports and GBIC ports are both reported in software as GigabitEthernet 0/1,

GigabitEthernet 0/2, and GigabitEthernet 0/3. Only one of the pair of interface ports can be used at

a time; for example, GBIC GigabitEthernet 0/2 or RJ-45 GigabitEthernet 0/2.

•

The I/O controller GE/E interface reports GigabitEthernet 0/0 and Ethernet 0/0, and the I/O

controller 2FE/E interface reports FastEthernet 0/0 and FastEthernet 0/1.

If the RJ-45 port is in use, the EN (Enable) LED is on. If the GBIC is in use, the EN (Enable) LED

is off.

With the NPE-G1 and an I/O controller both installed, the I/O controller functionality on the

NPE-G1 is shared with that of the I/O controller.

When both an NPE-G1 and an I/O controller are installed, the flash memory and NVRAM of the

NPE-G1 are enabled and the flash memory and NVRAM on the I/O controller are no longer

accessible.

•

The console and auxiliary ports on the NPE-G1 are disabled by Cisco IOS when an I/O controller is

present; the console and auxiliary ports on the I/O controller are active.

Console port messages can be routed to the auxiliary port on either the NPE-G1 or on the I/O

controller.

•

The default media is the RJ-45 port. To change the media type, use the media-type command.

Only the port selected by the media-type command is active. A cable attached to the other of the

RJ-45 and GBIC pair will be ignored. For example, if GBIC GigabitEthernet 0/2 is selected using

the media-type command, RJ-45 GigabitEthernet 0/2 is ignored, even if a cable is attached to

RJ-45 0/2.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

5-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 NPE-G1 Overview

NPE-G1 Description and Overview

•

The NPE-G1 uses no bandwidth points, and when used with any I/O controller, the I/O controller

also uses no bandwidth points. None of the Gigabit Ethernet interfaces on the NPE-G1 use

bandwidth points.

The CompactFlash Disk on the NPE-G1 is available at all times, with or without an I/O controller

installed. The CompactFlash Disk is always addressed as the disk2 device, to avoid conflicts with

the disk0 and disk1 devices on the I/O controller, if the I/O controller is also installed.

Note

The Gigabit Ethernet interfaces on the NPE-G1 do not support the Inter-Switch Link (ISL) VLAN

encapsulation protocol. We recommend that customers use the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN encapsulation

protocol as an alternative. Where an application requir

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

5-8

Chapter 5 NPE-G1 Overview

NPE-G1 Memory Information

•

Primary and secondary cache—Hierarchical cache memory storage based on the proximity of the

cache to the core of the processor. Primary cache is closest to the processor core and has the fastest

access. Secondary cache has slower access than primary cache.

•

RAM—random-access memory

RISC—reduced instruction set computing

ROM—read-only memory

SDRAM—synchronous dynamic random-access memory

SDRAM-fixed—SDRAM of a fixed size or quantity; can be replaced, but not upgraded

SODIMM—small outline dual in-line memory module

Unified cache—Instruction cache and data cache are combined. For example, a processor may have

primary cache with separate instruction and data cache memory, but unified secondary cache.

NPE-G1 Memory Information

To determine the memory configuration of your NPE-G1, use the show version command.

The following example shows an NPE-G1 installed in a Cisco 7206VXR router. The display for a

Cisco uBR7246VXR router is similar.

Router# show version

Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software

IOS (tm) 7200 Software (C7200-P-M), Experimental Version

12.2(20011112:161132)

Compiled Tue 13-Nov-01 03:58 by

Image text-base:0x600089B8, data-base:0x6130A000

(display text omitted)

cisco 7206VXR (NPE-G1) processor (revision 0x00) with 245760K/16384K

bytes of memory.

Processor board ID 15191620

BCM12500 CPU at 700Mhz, Implementation 1, Rev 0.1, 512KB L2 Cache

6 slot VXR midplane, Version 2.0

(display text omitted)

Table 5-1 provides memory specifications and Table 5-2 provides user replaceable memory

configuration information for the NPE-G1. Table 5-3 provides CompactFlash Disk specifications.

Table 5-1

NPE-G1 Memory Specifications

Component

Location on the

Memory Type

SDRAM

Size

Quantity Description

NPE-G1 Board

128-MB, 256-MB, or 512-MB SODIMMs¹J3 and J4

Reprogrammable Boot ROM for the ROM U1

128 MB, 256 MB, 512 MB

512 KB

Boot ROM

monitor program

Flash memory

16 MB

Contains the default boot helper (boot

loader) image

U25 and U26

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

5-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 NPE-G1 Overview

Connection Equipment and Specifications

Table 5-1

NPE-G1 Memory Specifications (continued)

Component

Location on the

NPE-G1 Board

Memory Type

Size

Quantity Description

NVRAM

512 KB

Nonvolatile EPROM for the system

configuration file

Primary cache

32 KB (16 KB instruction,

16 KB data)

—

BCM1250 system, internal cache

U22

Secondary cache 512 KB

BCM1250 system, internal, unified cache

U22

1. The NPE-G1 requires that locations J3 and J4 always contain two SODIMMs of the same size.

Table 5-2

NPE-G1 SDRAM SODIMM Configurations—Configurable Memory Only

Total SDRAM

256 MB

512 MB

1 GB

SDRAM Bank

J3 and J4

Quantity

Product Number

2 128-MB SODIMMs

2 256-MB SODIMMs

2 512-MB SODIMMs

MEM-NPE-G1-256MB=

MEM-NPE-G1-512MB=

MEM-NPE-G1-1GB=

J3 and J4

Table 5-3

NPE-G1 CompactFlash Disk Specifications

Memory Size

64 MB

Product Number

MEM-NPE-G1-FLD64=

MEM-NPE-G1-FLD128=

MEM-NPE-G1-FLD256=

128 MB

256 MB

Connection Equipment and Specifications

This section contains connection equipment and pinout information for the Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports,

Gigabit Interface Converter (GBIC) ports, console port, and auxiliary port that are located on the

NPE-G1.

Ethernet and Fast Ethernet RJ-45 Connection Equipment

The NPE-G1 has RJ-45 ports for Ethernet, Fast Ethernet, and Gigabit Ethernet or autosensing Ethernet,

Fast Ethernet, and Gigabit Ethernet connections. The RJ-45 port supports IEEE 802.3 (Ethernet) and

IEEE 802.3u (Fast Ethernet) interfaces compliant with 10BASET, 100BASETX, and 1000BASET and

1000BASEX specifications.

The RJ-45 ports support standard straight-through and crossover Category 5 UTP cables with RJ-45

connectors. (See Figure 5-5) Cisco does not supply Category 5 UTP cables; these cables are available

commercially.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

5-10

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 NPE-G1 Overview

Connection Equipment and Specifications

Note

To comply with EMI EN55022 Class B regulations, shielded Ethernet cables must be used with the

UBR7200-NPE-G1 in the Cisco uBR7246VXR router. Three shielded cables are included with the

UBR7200-NPE-G1.

Figure 5-5 shows an RJ-45 port and connector. Table 5-4 lists the pinouts and signals for the RJ-45 port.

Figure 5-5

RJ-45 Port and Connector

12345678

RJ-45 connector

Warning

To avoid electric shock, do not connect safety extra-low voltage (SELV) circuits to telephone-network

voltage (TNV) circuits. LAN ports contain SELV circuits, and WAN ports contain TNV circuits. Some

LAN and WAN ports both use RJ-45 connectors. Use caution when connecting cables. Statement 1021

Table 5-4

RJ-45 Port Pinouts

10/100 Signal

Tx Data+¹

Tx Data–

Rx Data+²

N/C

Gigabit Ethernet Signal

Tx A+

Tx A–

Rx B+

Tx C+

N/C

Tx C–

Rx Data–

N/C

Rx B–

Rx D+

Rx D-

1. Tx Data = Transmit Data

2. Rx Data = Receive Data

Note

With reference to the RJ-45 pinout in Table 5-4, proper common-mode line terminations should be used

for the unused Category 5 UTP cable pairs 4/5 and 7/8. Common-mode termination reduces

electromagnetic interference (EMI).

Depending on your RJ-45 interface cabling requirements, use the pinouts shown in Figure 5-6 and

Figure 5-7 for Gigabit Ethernet straight-through and crossover twisted-pair cable connections. Use

Figure 5-8 for Ethernet/Fast Ethernet straight-through and crossover twisted-pair cable connections.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

5-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 NPE-G1 Overview

Connection Equipment and Specifications

Figure 5-6

Four Twisted-Pair Straight-Through Cable Schematics for 10/100/1000 and

1000BASET GBIC Module Ports

1 TPO+

2 TPO-

3 TP1+

6 TP1-

1 TP1+

2 TP1-

3 TPO+

6 TPO-

4 TP2+

5 TP2-

7 TP3+

8 TP3-

4 TP3+

5 TP3-

7 TP2+

8 TP2-

Router

Hub

Figure 5-7

Four Twisted-Pair Crossover Cable Schematics for 10/100/1000 and 1000BASET GBIC

Module Ports

1 TPO+

2 TPO-

3 TP1+

6 TP1-

1 TP0+

2 TP0-

3 TP1+

6 TP1-

4 TP2+

5 TP2-

7 TP3+

8 TP3-

4 TP2+

5 TP2-

7 TP3+

8 TP3-

Router

Hub

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

5-12

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 NPE-G1 Overview

Connection Equipment and Specifications

Figure 5-8

Ethernet/Fast Ethernet Straight-Through and Crossover Cable Pinouts

1 TxD+

2 TxD–

1 RxD+

2 RxD–

1 TxD+

2 TxD–

1 TxD+

2 TxD–

3 RxD+

6 RxD–

3 TxD+

6 TxD–

3 RxD+

6 RxD–

3 RxD+

6 RxD–

Straight-through cable pinout, Ethernet port

to a hub or repeater

Hub

Crossover cable pinout, Ethernet port to a

DTE

Ethernet port

For straight-through and crossover cable information, see the “Console and Auxiliary Port Connection

Equipment” section on page 5-17.

Gigabit Ethernet GBIC Connection Equipment

The Gigabit Interface Converter (GBIC) port is a 1000-Mbps optical interface in the form of an SC-type

duplex port that supports IEEE 802.3z interfaces compliant with the 1000BASEX standard. (See

Figure 5-10.)

Note

The GBIC is a separately orderable part and does not ship installed in your NPE-G1. You must install

the GBIC before you connect the cables to it. (For GBIC installation and cabling instructions, refer to

the Installing the Gigabit Interface Converter document that shipped with your GBIC.)

Warning

Because invisible laser radiation may be emitted from the aperture of the port when no cable is

connected, avoid exposure to laser radiation and do not stare into open apertures. Statement 70

Figure 5-9 shows the Class 1 warning label that appears on the Gigabit Ethernet optical ports.

Figure 5-9

Laser Class 1 Warning Label

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

LASERPRODUKT DER KLASSE 1

PRODUIT LASER DE CLASSE 1

PRODUCTO LASER CLASE 1

Warning

Class 1 Laser Product. Statement 1008

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

5-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 NPE-G1 Overview

Connection Equipment and Specifications

Figure 5-10 shows the simplex and duplex SC-type connectors on your multimode or single-mode

optical fiber cables. For simplex connectors, two cables are required, one cable for transmit (TX) and a

second cable for receive (RX). For duplex connectors, only one cable that has both TX and RX

connectors is required. You can use either simplex or duplex connectors for the NPE-G1.

Figure 5-10

GBIC Port Connections

E T H E R N E T 0 / 1

R X

G B I C

T X

To external 1000BASEX network

1 duplex connector (TX and RX)

To external 1000BASEX network

2 simplex connectors

RX (GBIC port 0/1)

TX (GBIC port 0/1)

Table 5-5 describes the available GBIC options.

Table 5-5

GBIC Options

GBIC

Product Number

Description

WS-G5484= or

GBIC-SX=

Short wavelength

(1000BASESX)

Operates on standard multimode

fiber-optic link spans of up to 1804 ft

(550 m).

WS-G5486= or

GBIC-LX/LH=

Long wavelength/long haul

(1000BASELX/LH)

Operates on single-mode and multimode

fiber-optic link spans of up to 6.2 miles

(10 km).

WS-G5487= or

GBIC-ZX=

Extended distance

(1000BASEZX)

Operates on ordinary single-mode

fiber-optic link spans of up to 43.5 miles

(70 km). Link spans of up to 62.1 miles

(100 km) are possible using premium

single-mode fiber or dispersion-shifted

single-mode fiber.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

5-14

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 NPE-G1 Overview

Connection Equipment and Specifications

Table 5-6 lists the available CWDM GBIC options.

Table 5-6 CWDM GBIC Options

Product Number CWDM GBIC

Color

CWDM-GBIC-1470=

CWDM-GBIC-1490=

CWDM-GBIC-1510=

CWDM-GBIC-1530=

CWDM-GBIC-1550=

CWDM-GBIC-1570=

CWDM-GBIC-1590=

CWDM-GBIC-1610=

Cisco 1000BASE-CWDM GBIC-1470 nm

Cisco 1000BASE-CWDM GBIC-1490 nm

Cisco 1000BASE-CWDM GBIC-1510 nm

Cisco 1000BASE-CWDM GBIC-1530 nm

Cisco 1000BASE-CWDM GBIC-1550 nm

Cisco 1000BASE-CWDM GBIC-1570 nm

Cisco 1000BASE-CWDM GBIC-1590 nm

Cisco 1000BASE-CWDM GBIC-1610 nm

Gray

Violet

Blue

Green

Yellow

Orange

Red

Brown

Table 5-7 provides cabling specifications for the GBICs that you install in Gigabit Ethernet devices.

Note that all GBIC ports have SC-type connectors. Also, the minimum cable distance for the WS-G5484

or GBIC-SX and WS-G5486 or GBIC-LX/LH (multimode fiber [MMF] and single-mode fiber [SMF])

is 6.5 feet (2 m), and the minimum link distance for the WS-G5487 or GBIC-ZX is 6.2 miles (10 km)

with an 8-dB attenuator installed at each end of the link. Without attenuators, the minimum link distance

for the WS-G5487 or GBIC-ZX is 24.9 miles (40 km).

Note

Optical fiber cables are commercially available; they are not available from Cisco.

Table 5-7

GBIC Port Cabling Specifications

Modal

Bandwidth

(MHz/km)

Wavelength

(nm)

Core Size

(micron)

Maximum

Cable Distance

GBIC

Fiber Type

WS-G5484 or

GBIC-SX

850

MMF¹

62.5

50.0

62.5

50.0

9/10

160

200

400

500

400

500

—

722 ft (220 m)

902 ft (275 m)

1640 ft (500 m)

1804 ft (550 m)

WS-G5486 or

GBIC-LX/LH

1300

1550

MMF²and

SMF

6.2 miles

(10 km)

WS-G5487 or

GBIC-ZX

SMF

9/10

—

43.5 miles

(70 km)

SMF³

62.1 miles

(100 km)

1. Multimode fiber (MMF) only.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

5-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 NPE-G1 Overview

Connection Equipment and Specifications

2. A mode-conditioning patch cord is required.

When using the WS-G5486 or GBIC-LX/LH with 62.5-micron diameter MMF, you must install a mode-conditioning patch

cord between the GBIC and the MMF cable on both the transmit and the receive ends of the link when link distances are

greater than 984 ft (300 m). We do not recommend using the WS-G5486 or GBIC-LX/LH and MMF with no patch cord for

very short link distances (tens of meters). The result could be an elevated bit error rate (BER).

3. Dispersion-shifted single-mode optical fiber cable.

Table 5-8 provides the GBIC transmit and receive power requirements and power budget.

Table 5-8

GBIC Power Requirements and Power Budget

Transmit Power Receive Power

GBIC

Minimum

Maximum

Minimum

Maximum

Power Budget

WS-G5484 or –9.5 dBm¹

–4 dBm¹

–17 dBm

0 dBm

7.5 dBm²

GBIC-SX

WS-G5486 or –9.5 dBm³

GBIC-LX/LH

–11.5dBm⁴

–3 dBm⁵

5.2 dBm

–20 dBm

–24 dBm

–3 dBm

7.5 dBm⁶and 8.0 dBm⁷

–24 dBm

WS-G5487 or 0 dBm

GBIC-ZX

1. For fiber types 50/125 μm, NA = 0.20 fiber and 62.5/125 μm, NA = 0.275 fiber.

2. For fiber types 50 μm MMF and 62.5 μm MMF.

3. For fiber types 9/125 μm SMF.

4. For fiber types 62.5/125 μm MMF and 50/125 μm MMF.

5. For fiber types 9/125 μm SMF, 62.5/125 μm MMF, and 50/125 μm MMF.

6. For fiber types 50 μm MMF and 62.5 μm MMF.

7. For fiber type 10 μm SMF.

Mode-Conditioning Patch Cord Description

A mode-conditioning patch cord can be used with the WS-G5486= or GBIC-LX/LH= to allow reliable

laser transmission between the single-mode laser source on the GBIC and a multimode optical fiber

cable.

When an unconditioned laser source designed for operation on single-mode optical fiber is directly

coupled to a multimode optical fiber cable, an effect known as differential mode delay (DMD) might

result in a degradation of the modal bandwidth of the optical fiber cable.

This degradation results in a decrease in the link span (the distance between a transmitter and a receiver)

that can be supported reliably. The effect of DMD can be overcome by conditioning the launch

characteristics of a laser source. A practical means of performing this conditioning is to use a device

called a mode-conditioning patch cord.

A mode-conditioning patch cord is an optical fiber cable assembly that consists of a pair of optical fibers

terminated with connector hardware. Specifically, the mode-conditioning patch cord is composed of a

single-mode optical fiber permanently coupled off-center (see Offset in Figure 5-11) to a graded-index

multimode optical fiber. Figure 5-11 shows a diagram of the mode-conditioning patch cord assembly.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

5-16

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 NPE-G1 Overview

Connection Equipment and Specifications

Figure 5-11

Mode Conditioning Patch Cord

The mode-conditioning patch cord assembly is composed of duplex optical fibers, including a

single-mode-to-multimode offset launch fiber connected to the transmitter, and a second conventional

graded-index multimode optical fiber connected to the receiver. The use of a plug-to-plug patch cord

maximizes the power budget of multimode 1000BASELX and 1000BASELH links.

The mode-conditioning patch cord is required to comply with IEEE standards. The IEEE found that link

distances could not be met with certain types of fiber-optic cable cores. The solution is to launch light

from the laser at a precise offset from the center, which is accomplished by using the mode-conditioning

patch cord. At the output of the patch cord, the WS-G5486 or GBIC-LX/LH is compliant with the IEEE

802.3z standard for 1000BASELX.

Console and Auxiliary Port Connection Equipment

The NPE-G1 has a DCE-mode console port for connecting a console terminal, and a DTE-mode

auxiliary port for connecting a modem or other DCE device (such as a CSU/DSU or other router) to your

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

5-17

Chapter 5 NPE-G1 Overview

Connection Equipment and Specifications

Note

When connecting to an auxiliary port on a Cisco 7200 VXR router, the port will not function at baud

rates higher than 19.2k. If the baud rate on the connecting device is set higher than 19.2k, either

garbled text or nothing will be displayed on the screen.

Refer to Table 5-9 for a list of the pins used on the RJ-45-to-DB-25 adapters, used with an RJ-45 cable,

to connect terminals and modems to the Cisco 7200 series routers. The cable you use may be a roll-over

cable or a straight cable.

Table 5-9

Pinouts for the RJ-45-to-DB-25 Adapters

Adapter

DTE M/F Pins¹

DCE M/F Pins

MMOD Pins²

1. The female data terminal equipment (FDTE) adapter that is available from Cisco is labeled “Terminal”.

2. The MMOD adapter that is available from Cisco is labeled “Modem”.

A roll-over cable can be detected by comparing the two modular ends of the cable. Holding the cables

in your hand, side-by-side, with the tab at the back, the wire connected to the pin on the outside of the

left plug should be the same color as the pin on the outside of the right plug. If your cable was purchased

from Cisco, pin 1 will be white on one connector, and pin 8 will be white on the other (a roll-over cable

reverses pins 1 and 8, 2 and 7, 3 and 6, and 4 and 5). (See Figure 5-12.)

Figure 5-12

Identifying a Roll-Over Cable

Pin 1 and pin 8

should be the

same color

Pin 1

Pin 8

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

5-18

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 NPE-G1 Overview

Connection Equipment and Specifications

The Cisco 7200 series routers ship with a roll-over cable. Connection to a terminal or a modem requires

an RJ-45-to-DB-25 adapter, and possibly a DB-25-to-DB9 adapter. Refer to Table 5-10 for the cable and

adapter configurations that can be used to connect terminals and modems to the Cisco 7200 series

routers.

Table 5-10

Asynchronous Device Cabling Options

RJ-45 Cable Type DB-25 Adapter

Access Server Port

End Device

The cable and auxiliary ports are configured as asynchronous serial ports. Figure 5-13 shows the RJ-45

console and auxiliary port connections.

Figure 5-13

Console and Auxiliary Port RJ-45 Connections

A cable and adapter kit is available from Cisco (Product Number ACS-2500ASYN=). Table 5-10

describes the cable and adapter configurations that can be used to connect terminals and modems to the

console or the auxiliary port.

RJ-45 Console Port Signals and Pinouts

The NPE-G1 console port supports Data Carrier Detect (DCD). Table 5-11 lists the RJ-45 console port

signals for the NPE-G1.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

5-19

Chapter 5 NPE-G1 Overview

Fiber Optic Cleaning Information

Table 5-11

Console Port Signals for the NPE-G1

Pin¹

Signal

CTS

Direction

Out

—

Description

Clear To Send (tracks RTS)

Data Set Ready (always on)

Receive Data

DSR

RXD

GND

TXD

DTR

RTS

Signal Ground

Transmit Data

Data Terminal Ready

Ready To Send

1. Any pin not referenced is not connected.

RJ-45 Auxiliary Port Signals and Pinouts

Table 5-12 lists the RJ-45 auxiliary port signals for the NPE-G1.

Table 5-12

Auxiliary Port Signals for the NPE-G1

Pin¹Signal

Direction

Out

Description

RTS

Ready To Send

Data Terminal Ready

Transmit Data

Ring Indication

Signal Ground

Receive Data

DTR

TXD

RING²

GND

RXD

—

7³

DSR/DCD(RLSD) In

Data Set Ready/Data Carrier Detect (Receive Line Signal

Detect)

CTS In

Clear To Send (tracks RTS)

1. Any pin not referenced is not connected.

2. RING is not supported on Cisco-supplied adapters. To use this pin, you must create a customized cable.

3. Pin 7 can be used as a DCD input for connection to a modem. The RJ-45-to-DB-25F adapter maps DCD to this pin when

used with a straight-through cable.

Fiber Optic Cleaning Information

We strongly recommend cleaning all optical fiber connections before reconnecting optical cables to

equipment. For information about cleaning optical connectors, see the Inspection and Cleaning

Procedures for Fiber-Optic Connections document and the Compressed Air Cleaning Issues for

Fiber-Optic Connections document.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

5-20

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C H A P T E R

NPE-G2 Overview

This chapter describes the NPE-G2 and contains the following sections:

•

Supported Platforms, page 6-1

Software Requirements, page 6-2

NPE-G2 Description and Overview, page 6-2

NPE-G2 Memory Information and Specifications, page 6-11

Fiber Optic Cleaning Information, page 6-23

Caution

You must copy and save your running configuration file to a CompactFlash Disk, PC Card, or TFTP

server before you install the NPE-G2. For instructions on copying and saving your configuration file, see

the “Copying the Configuration File” section on page 7-4 in Chapter 7, “NPE-G1 and NPE-G2

Installation and Configuration Information.”

For general preparation for installation instructions, see Chapter 8, “Preparation for Installation.” For

installation and configuration instructions specific to the NPE-G2, see Chapter 7, “NPE-G1 and NPE-G2

Installation and Configuration Information.”

Supported Platforms

The NPE-G2 is supported on the Cisco 7200 VXR routers and Cisco uBR7200 series routers. For the

Cisco 7200 VXR routers, order Part Number NPE-G2 or NPE-G2=. For the Cisco uBR7200 series

routers, order Part Number UBR7200-NPE-G2 or UBR7200-NPE-G2=.

Note

Unless otherwise indicated, all references to NPE-G2 in this document also refer to UBR7200-NPE-G2.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

6-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6 NPE-G2 Overview

Software Requirements

For minimum software release information, see the “Software Requirements” section on page 8-4.

Note

The NPE-G2 has its own Cisco IOS software image with the prefix “c7200p-” in the software images

filenames, including the boot image. The NPE-G2 does not boot up with a software image with the prefix

“c7200-”. Previous network processing engines, or the network services engine, do not boot up with the

“c7200p-” boot image. They use the prefix “c7200-”.

NPE-G2 Description and Overview

This section contains information about the NPE-G2 components and the system management functions.

The following information is in this section:

•

Bandwidth Requirements, page 6-3

Components, page 6-3

Interfaces, page 6-4

LEDs, page 6-5

CompactFlash Disk, page 6-6

USB Ports, page 6-8

Summary of Important NPE-G2 Information, page 6-9

System Management Functions, page 6-10

Terms and Acronyms, page 6-10

Like the NPE-G1, the NPE-G2 provides the functionality of both a network processing engine and I/O

controller. If used without an I/O controller, an I/O controller blank panel must be in place.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

6-2

Chapter 6 NPE-G2 Overview

NPE-G2 Description and Overview

Bandwidth Requirements

The Gigabit Ethernet ports on the NPE-G2 do not use bandwidth points, nor does the Fast Ethernet

management port. When used with any I/O controller, the Ethernet ports, Fast Ethernet ports, or Gigabit

Ethernet ports on the I/O controller also do not use bandwidth points.

Components

Figure 6-1 illustrates the NPE-G2 and its major components.

Figure 6-1

NPE-G2

Midplane connectors

Boot ROM (U24)

Flash memory (U13)

DIMM (socket—S1)

NVRAM (on bottom of board—U17)

Temperature sensor (outlet—U20)

Flash memory (U19)

Temperature sensor (inlet—U23)

Processor (U30)

10 Keying post

The NPE-G2 consists of the following components:

Motorola Freescale 7448 processor

•

–

Microprocessor operates at an internal clock speed of 1.67 GHz.

Hardware logic to interconnect the processor, double data rate synchronous dynamic

random-access memory (DDR-SDRAM), lightning data transport (LDT) bus, the generic PCI

bus, and three direct-interface Gigabit Ethernet interfaces.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

6-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6 NPE-G2 Overview

NPE-G2 Description and Overview

•

Cache memory

The NPE-G2 has two levels of cache: primary and secondary cache that are internal to the

microprocessor with secondary unified cache for data and instruction.

•

The NPE-G2 uses DDR SDRAM for providing code, data, and packet storage.

Two environmental sensors for monitoring the cooling air as it enters and leaves the chassis.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

6-4

Chapter 6 NPE-G2 Overview

NPE-G2 Description and Overview

•

The port numbering for the interfaces on the NPE-G2 starts with 0/1 and not with 0/0, as is typical

for other interface cards. This is to avoid conflicts with the Ethernet and Fast Ethernet ports on an

I/O controller, if it is also installed.

Figure 6-2

NPE-G2 Interfaces

Note

The Fast Ethernet Management RJ-45 port is only used for management activities—not for any other

purpose.

The USB function is not supported on Cisco uBR7200 series routers.

LEDs

This section provides information about the location and behavior of the NPE-G2 LEDs.

The NPE-G2 faceplate contains LEDs that indicate system and port status. The RJ-45 and SFP ports

share the same LINK ACTV LED because only one of these ports per interface (0/1, 0/2, or 0/3) can be

used at any one time. The EN (Enable) LED is on if the RJ-45 port is in use.

The PWR OK LED is on whether or not an I/O controller is present in the router. The CompactFlash

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

6-5

Chapter 6 NPE-G2 Overview

NPE-G2 Description and Overview

Figure 6-3

NPE-G2 LEDs

GIGABIT ETHERNET 0 / 3

LINK

CTV

RJ45

LINK

NETW

ORK PR

OCESSING ENGINE - G2

CONSOLE

COMP

CT FLASH

FE 0/2

FOR MANA

GEMENT

USE ONL

USB

SYST

TAT

CTV

PWR

Table 6-1

No. LED Label

LED

Color

Description

Link with no activity

Flashing green Link with activity

LINK ACTV

(Interfaces 0/1, 0/2, ports

RJ-45 and SFP

Solid green

0/3)

Off

No link

EN (Enable)

(Interfaces 0/1, 0/2,

0/3)

RJ-45 ports only

Solid green

Off

RJ-45 port is selected.

SFP port is selected.

FE LINK

Fast Ethernet

Management port

Solid green

Link with no activity

Flashing green Link with activity

Off No link

Flashing green Activity

USB

USB ports

Off

No activity

CF ACTV

SYST STAT

CompactFlash

Disk

Flashing green Activity

Off

No activity

System status

Blinking green Cisco IOS is loading.

Solid green

Cisco IOS has successfully

booted.

Blinking yellow ROMmon is loading.

Solid yellow

ROMmon has successfully

booted.

PWR OK

Power

Green

Off

The NPE-G2 has powered on.

No activity

CompactFlash Disk

The NPE-G2 has one CompactFlash Disk slot that uses CompactFlash Disks. The device in this slot is

always addressed as disk2: when using Cisco IOS CLI commands.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

6-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6 NPE-G2 Overview

NPE-G2 Description and Overview

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

6-7

Chapter 6 NPE-G2 Overview

NPE-G2 Description and Overview

To remove a CompactFlash Disk from the CompactFlash Disk slot, complete the following steps:

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

Press the ejector button on the slot. (See 3 in Figure 6-4.)

Grasp the CompactFlash Disk and pull it from the slot.

Place the CompactFlash Disk in an antistatic bag.

Note

All CompactFlash Disks must be formatted before their initial use. CompactFlash Disks shipped with

the NPE-G2 are formatted at the factory, but spare memory cards are not formatted.

USB Ports

The NPE-G2 provides two USB ports that can be used with USB Flash memory modules as secondary

storage, similar to CompactFlash Disks. The USB Flash memory modules can be used to store Cisco IOS

images, data, and configuration files. See Table 6-5 for USB Flash memory module product options and

numbers.

The NPE-G2 includes USB ports that can be used with Cisco USB Flash memory modules or with the

Aladdin USB eToken Pro key. These USB devices can be used with the NPE-G2 for the following

functions:

•

The USB eToken Pro key by Aladdin Knowledge Systems provides a secure means to store and

deploy information, such as a bootstrap configuration or VPN credentials, separate from the router

chassis. The USB eToken uses smart card technology to protect a small area of memory and grants

access using a personal identification number (PIN). When IP Security (IPSec) VPN credentials are

stored on the USB eToken, they are safely external to the router. When the USB eToken is inserted

in a USB port, the router can pass the PIN and unlock it, retrieving the credentials and copying them

into running memory. When the USB eToken is removed, the router will erase the credentials from

running memory, ensuring that they cannot be retrieved from the router itself.

Note

For more information about the USB eToken Pro key by Aladdin Knowledge Systems, see

the Aladdin website at www.aladdin.com/etoken/cisco.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

6-8

Chapter 6 NPE-G2 Overview

NPE-G2 Description and Overview

Summary of Important NPE-G2 Information

Caution

The NPE-G2 requires that you copy and save your running configuration file to a CompactFlash Disk,

PC Card, or TFTP server before you install the NPE-G2. For instructions on copying and saving your

configuration file, see the “Copying the Configuration File” section on page 7-4 in Chapter 7, “NPE-G1

and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information.”

For general preparation for installation instructions, see Chapter 8, “Preparation for Installation.” For

installation and configuration instructions specific to the NPE-G2, see Chapter 7, “NPE-G1 and NPE-G2

Installation and Configuration Information.”

•

The NPE-G2 software image and kboot image name begins with “c7200p-”, which is different from

that of previous network processing engines.

The RJ-45 ports and SFP ports are both reported in software as GigabitEthernet 0/1, GigabitEthernet

0/2, and GigabitEthernet 0/3. Only one of the pair of interface ports can be used at a time; for

example, SFP GigabitEthernet 0/2 or RJ-45 GigabitEthernet 0/2.

•

The I/O controller GE/E interface reports GigabitEthernet 0/0 and Ethernet 0/0, and the I/O

controller 2FE/E interface reports FastEthernet 0/0 and FastEthernet 0/1.

If the RJ-45 port is in use, the EN (Enable) LED is on. If the SFP port is in use, the EN (Enable)

LED is off.

With the NPE-G2 and an I/O controller both installed, the I/O controller functionality on the

NPE-G2 is shared with that of the I/O controller.

When both an NPE-G2 and an I/O controller are installed, the flash memory and NVRAM of the

NPE-G2 are enabled and the flash memory

•

and NVRAM on the I/O controller are no longer accessible.

The console and auxiliary ports on the NPE-G2 are disabled by Cisco IOS when an I/O controller is

present; the console and auxiliary ports on the I/O controller are active.

•

Console port messages can be routed to the auxiliary port on either the NPE-G2 or on the I/O

controller.

•

The default media is the RJ-45 port. To change the media type, use the media-type command.

Only the port selected by the media-type command is active. A cable attached to the other of the

RJ-45 and SFP module pair will be ignored. For example, if SFP port GigabitEthernet 0/2 is selected

using the media-type command, RJ-45 GigabitEthernet 0/2 is ignored, even if a cable is attached to

RJ-45 0/2.

•

The NPE-G2 uses no bandwidth points, and when used with any I/O controller, the I/O controller

also uses no bandwidth points. None of the Gigabit Ethernet interfaces on the NPE-G2 use

bandwidth points.

The CompactFlash Disk on the NPE-G2 is available at all times, with or without an I/O controller

installed. The CompactFlash Disk is always addressed as the disk2 device, to avoid conflicts with

the disk0 and disk1 devices on the I/O controller, if the I/O controller is also installed.

USB Flash memory modules are available for data storage, with or without an I/O controller

installed.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

6-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6 NPE-G2 Overview

NPE-G2 Description and Overview

Note

The Gigabit Ethernet interfaces on the NPE-G2 do not support the Inter-Switch Link (ISL) VLAN

encapsulation protocol. We recommend that customers use the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN encapsulation

protocol as an alternative. Where an application requires the use of ISL, this can be provided by the Fast

Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet port adapters or I/O controllers.

System Management Functions

The NPE-G2 performs the following system management functions:

•

Sending and receiving routing protocol updates

Managing tables, caches, and buffers

Monitoring interface and environmental status

Providing Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) management through the console and

Telnet interface

•

Accounting for and switching of data traffic

Booting and reloading images

Managing port adapters (including recognition and initialization during online insertion and

removal)

Terms and Acronyms

•

Boot ROM—Read-only memory that stores the boot image for bringing up the Cisco IOS image.

•

Cache—Memory with fast access and small capacity used to temporarily store recently accessed

data; found either incorporated into the processor or near it.

•

CWDM— Coarse Wavelength-Division Multiplexing.

DIMM— Dual In-line Memory Module.

DDR SDRAM—double data rate synchronous dynamic random-access memory.

Flash memory—Location where the basic boot image is stored.

Instruction and data cache—Instructions to the processor, and data on which the instructions work.

Integrated cache—Cache that is built into the processor; sometimes referred to as internal cache.

Cache memory physically located outside the processor is not integrated, and is sometimes referred

to as external cache.

•

LDT bus—lightning data transport bus.

NVRAM—nonvolatile random-access memory.

OTP—one time programmable.

Primary and secondary cache—Hierarchical cache memory storage based on the proximity of the

cache to the core of the processor. Primary cache is closest to the processor core and has the fastest

access. Secondary cache has slower access than primary cache.

•

RAM—random-access memory.

RISC—reduced instruction set computing.

ROM—read-only memory.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

6-10

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6 NPE-G2 Overview

NPE-G2 Memory Information and Specifications

•

SDRAM—synchronous dynamic random-access memory.

SDRAM-fixed—SDRAM of a fixed size or quantity; can be replaced, but not upgraded.

SFP module—small form-factor pluggable module.

Unified cache—Instruction cache and data cache are combined. For example, a processor may have

primary cache with separate instruction and data cache memory, but unified secondary cache.

•

USB—universal serial bus.

NPE-G2 Memory Information and Specifications

To determine the memory configuration of your NPE-G2, use the show version command.

The following example shows an NPE-G2 installed in a Cisco 7206VXR router.

Router# show version

Cisco IOS Software, 7200 Software (C7200-JS-M), Version 12.4(PC_D.051028)

CISCO DEVELOPMENT TEST VERSION

Compiled Fri 28-Oct-05 00:30 by

ROM: System Bootstrap, Version 12.3(20050910:182137) [xxxx 103], DEVELOPMENT SOFTWARE

7448-1 uptime is 2 days, 17 hours, 52 minutes

System returned to ROM by power-on

System image file is "disk2:c7200p-js-mz"

Cisco 7206VXR (NPE-G2) processor (revision A) with 917504K/131072K bytes of memory.

Processor board ID 32428149

MPC7448 CPU at 1660Mhz, Implementation 0, Rev 2.0

6 slot VXR midplane, Version 2.8

Last reset from power-on

PCI bus mb1 (Slots 1, 3 and 5) has a capacity of 600 bandwidth points.

Current configuration on bus mb1 has a total of 780 bandwidth points.

The set of PA-2FE, PA-POS-2OC3, and I/O-2FE qualify for "half

bandwidth points" consideration, when full bandwidth point counting

results in oversubscription, under the condition that only one of the

two ports is used. With this adjustment, current configuration on bus

mb1 has a total of 480 bandwidth points.

This configuration is within the PCI bus capacity and is supported

under the above condition.

PCI bus mb2 (Slots 2, 4 and 6) has a capacity of 600 bandwidth points.

Current configuration on bus mb2 has a total of 1000 bandwidth points.

The set of PA-2FE, PA-POS-2OC3, and I/O-2FE qualify for "half

bandwidth points" consideration, when full bandwidth point counting

results in oversubscription, under the condition that only one of the

two ports is used. With this adjustment, current configuration on bus

mb2 has a total of 800 bandwidth points.

This configuration has oversubscripted the PCI bus and is not a

supported configuration.

Please refer to the following document "Cisco 7200 Series Port Adaptor

Hardware Configuration Guidelines" on Cisco.com <http://www.cisco.com>

for c7200 bandwidth points oversubscription and usage guidelines.

WARNING: PCI bus mb2 Exceeds 600 bandwidth points

3 FastEthernet interfaces

4 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces

2 Packet over SONET interfaces

2 Channelized T3 ports

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

6-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6 NPE-G2 Overview

NPE-G2 Memory Information and Specifications

2045K bytes of NVRAM.

250603K bytes of USB Flash usbflash0 (Read/Write)

125163K bytes of USB Flash usbflash1 (Read/Write)

250368K bytes of ATA PCMCIA card at slot 2 (Sector size 512 bytes).

65536K bytes of Flash internal SIMM (Sector size 512K).

Configuration register is 0x0

Table 6-2 provides memory specifications and Table 6-3 provides user replaceable memory

configuration information for the NPE-G2. Table 6-4 provides CompactFlash Disk specifications.

Table 6-5 provides USB Flash memory module information. Figure 6-5 provides I/O controller blank

panel information.

Table 6-2

NPE-G2 Memory Specifications

Component

Location on the

NPE-G2 Board

Memory Type

SDRAM

Size

Quantity Description

1 GB

512 KB

1-GB DDR SDRAM

Boot ROM

Reprogrammable Boot ROM for U24

the ROM monitor program

Flash memory

(also known as

bootflash)

64 MB

2 MB

Contains the default boot helper

(boot loader) image

U19 and U13

NVRAM

Nonvolatile EPROM for the

system configuration file

U17

Primary cache

32 KB

(16 KB

—

Motorola Freescale 7448 processor, U30

internal cache

instruction,

16 KB data)

Secondary cache 1 MB

—

Motorola Freescale 7448 secondary U30

cache

Table 6-3

NPE-G2 SDRAM Configuration—Configurable Memory Only

Total SDRAM

1 GB

SDRAM Bank

Quantity

Product Number

1 1-GB DIMM

1 2-GB DIMM

MEM-NPE-G2-1GB=

MEM-NPE-G2-2GB=

2 GB

Table 6-4

NPE-G2 CompactFlash Disk Specifications

Memory Size

Product Number

256 MB

MEM-NPE-G2-FLD256=

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

6-12

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6 NPE-G2 Overview

NPE-G2 Memory Information and Specifications

Table 6-5

NPE-G2 USB Flash Memory Module Specifications

Token Size

Product Number

64-MB USB Flash Token¹for Cisco 1800/2800/3800/7200

MEMUSB-64FT=

1. Also known as flash memory modules.

Connection Equipment and Specifications

This section contains connection equipment and pinout information for the Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports,

Gigabit Ethernet SFP ports and SFP modules, Fast Ethernet Management port, console port, and

auxiliary port that are located on the NPE-G2.

Ethernet and Fast Ethernet RJ-45 Connection Equipment

The NPE-G2 has RJ-45 ports for Ethernet, Fast Ethernet, and Gigabit Ethernet or autosensing Ethernet,

Fast Ethernet, and Gigabit Ethernet connections. The RJ-45 port supports IEEE 802.3 (Ethernet) and

IEEE 802.3u (Fast Ethernet) interfaces compliant with 10BASET, 100BASETX, and 1000BASET and

1000BASEX specifications.

The RJ-45 ports, including the Fast Ethernet Management port, support standard straight-through and

crossover Category 5 UTP cables with RJ-45 connectors. (See Figure 6-5.) Cisco does not supply

Category 5 UTP cables; these cables are available commercially.

Figure 6-5 shows an RJ-45 port and connector. Table 6-7 lists the pinouts and signals for the RJ-45 port.

Figure 6-5

RJ-45 Port and Connector

Warning

To avoid electric shock, do not connect safety extra-low voltage (SELV) circuits to telephone-network

voltage (TNV) circuits. LAN ports contain SELV circuits, and WAN ports contain TNV circuits. Some

LAN and WAN ports both use RJ-45 connectors. Use caution when connecting cables. Statement 1021

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

6-13

Chapter 6 NPE-G2 Overview

NPE-G2 Memory Information and Specifications

Note

With reference to the RJ-45 pinout in Table 6-7, proper common-mode line terminations should be used

for the unused Category 5 UTP cable pairs 4/5 and 7/8. Common-mode termination reduces

electromagnetic interference (EMI).

Depending on your RJ-45 interface cabling requirements, use the pinouts shown in Figure 6-6 and

Figure 6-7 for Gigabit Ethernet straight-through and cr

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

6-14

Chapter 6 NPE-G2 Overview

NPE-G2 Memory Information and Specifications

Figure 6-7

Four Twisted-Pair Crossover Cable Schematics for 10/100/1000 and 1000BASET SFP

Module Ports

1 TPO+

2 TPO-

3 TP1+

6 TP1-

1 TP0+

2 TP0-

3 TP1+

6 TP1-

4 TP2+

5 TP2-

7 TP3+

8 TP3-

4 TP2+

5 TP2-

7 TP3+

8 TP3-

Router

Hub

Figure 6-8

Ethernet/Fast Ethernet Straight-Through and Crossover Cable Pinouts

1 TxD+

2 TxD–

1 RxD+

2 RxD–

1 TxD+

2 TxD–

1 TxD+

2 TxD–

3 RxD+

6 RxD–

3 TxD+

6 TxD–

3 RxD+

6 RxD–

3 RxD+

6 RxD–

Straight-through cable pinout, Ethernet port

to a hub or repeater

Hub

Crossover cable pinout, Ethernet port to a

DTE

Ethernet port

For information about straight-through and crossover cables, see the “Console and Auxiliary Port

Connection Equipment” section on page 6-20.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

6-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6-16

Chapter 6 NPE-G2 Overview

NPE-G2 Memory Information and Specifications

Table 6-8 provides SFP module specifications.

The NPE-G2 supports single Gigabit Ethernet interfaces based on SFP technology. The following SFP

modules are supported by the NPE-G2:

•

100BASE-FX SFP—The SFP-GE-F=, 100BASE-FX SFP module is a hot-swappable device that

plugs into a Gigabit Ethernet SFP port. It provides full-duplex 100-Mbps connectivity between

switches over multimode fiber (MMF) infrastructures. The 100BASE-FX SFP operates on ordinary

MMF optical link spans of up to 6562 ft (2 km) in length. Customers implementing Cisco

100BASE-FX SFP can use 1000BASE-X SFP modules in the future (including SX, LH/LX, ZX, and

coarse wavelength-division multiplexing SFP modules).

•

1000BASE-LX/LH SFP—The SFP-GE-L=, 1000BASE-LX/LH SFP module operates on ordinary

single-mode fiber-optic link spans of up to 32,808 ft (10,000 m) in length.

1000BASE-SX SFP—The SFP-GE-S=, 1000BASE-SX SFP module operates on ordinary

multimode fiber-optic link spans of up to 1804 ft (550 m) in length.

1000BASE-ZX SFP—The SFP-GE-Z=, 1000BASE-ZX SFP module operates on ordinary single

mode fiber-optic link spans of up to 43.5 miles (70 km) in length. Link spans of up to 62.1 miles

(100 km) are possible using premium single-mode fiber or dispersion-shifted single-mode fiber. The

SFP module provides an optical link budget of 23 dB—the precise link span length depends on

multiple factors such as fiber quality, number of splices, and connectors.

When shorter distances of single-mode fiber are used, it may be necessary to insert an inline optical

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

6-17

Chapter 6 NPE-G2 Overview

NPE-G2 Memory Information and Specifications

Table 6-9 provides SFP port cabling specifications.

Table 6-9

SFP Port Cabling Specifications

Modal

Bandwidth

(MHz/km)

Wavelength

(nm)

Core Size

Fiber Type (microns)

SFP Module

Cable Distance

100BASE-FX

SFP-GE-F=

1270

1300

1380

MMF

62.5

2.5

50.0

500

6562 ft (2 km)

1000BASE-LX/LH 1300

SFP-GE-L=

MMF¹

62.5

50.0

9/10

500

400

500

—

1804 ft (550 m)

6.2 miles (10 km)

SMF

1000BASE-SX

SFP-GE-S=

850

MMF

62.5

50.0

160

200

400

500

722 ft (220 m)

902 ft (275 m)

1640 ft (500 m)

1804 ft (550 m)

1000BASE-ZX

SFP-GE-Z=

1550

SMF

9/10

—

43.5 miles (70 km)

1. A mode-conditioning patch cord is required. Using an ordinary patch cord with MMF, 1000BASE-LX/LH SFP modules, and

a short link distance (tens of meters) can cause transceiver saturation resulting in an elevated bit error rate (BER). In addition,

when using the LX/LH SFP module with 62.5-micron diameter MMF, you must install a mode-conditioning patch cord

between the SFP module and the MMF cable on both the transmit and receive ends of the link. The mode-conditioning patch

cord is required for link distances greater than 984 ft (300 m).

Table 6-10 provides SFP module power budget information.

Table 6-10

SFP Module Transmit Power, Receive Power, and Power Budget

SFP Module

Transmit Power Receive Power

Power Budget

Minimum

Maximum

Minimum

Maximum

SFP-GE-F=

SFP-GE-L=

-23.5 dBm¹

-14 dBm¹

-33.5 dBm¹

-11.8 dBm¹

10 dBm¹

-20 dBm²

-14 dBm²

-33.5 dBm²

-11.8 dBm²

13.5 dBm²

–9.5 dBm³

–11.5dBm⁴

–9.5 dBm⁸

0 dBm

–3 dBm⁵

–20 dBm

–3 dBm

7.5 dBm⁶and 8.0

dBm⁷

SFP-GE-S=

SFP-GE-Z=

–4 dBm⁸

5 dBm

–17 dBm

–23 dBm

0 dBm

7.5 dBm⁹

–24 dBm

1. For fiber type 50/125 mm SMF

2. For fiber type 62.5/125 mm SMF

3. For fiber types 9/125 μm SMF.

4. For fiber types 62.5/125 μm MMF and 50/125 μm MMF.

5. For fiber types 9/125 μm SMF, 62.5/125 μm MMF, and 50/125 μm MMF.

6. For fiber types 50/125 μm MMF and 62.5/125 μm MMF.

7. For fiber type 10 μm SMF.

8. For fiber types 50/125 μm, NA = 0.20 fiber and 62.5/125 μm, NA = 0.275 fiber.

9. For fiber types 50/125 μm MMF and 62.5/125 μm MMF.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

6-18

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6 NPE-G2 Overview

NPE-G2 Memory Information and Specifications

Table 6-11 provides CWDM SFP module option information for the NPE-G2.

Table 6-11 CWDM SFP Module Options

Product Number

Color

Gray

CWDM-SFP-1470

CWDM-SFP-1490

CWDM-SFP-1510

CWDM-SFP-1530

CWDM-SFP-1550

CWDM-SFP-1570

CWDM-SFP-1590

CWDM-SFP-1610

Violet

Blue

Green

Yellow

Orange

Red

Brown

Mode-Conditioning Patch Cord Description

A mode-conditioning patch cord can be used with the SFP-GE-L= (SFP module) to allow reliable laser

transmission between the single-mode laser source on the SFP module and a multimode optical fiber

cable.

When an unconditioned laser source designed for operation on single-mode optical fiber is directly

coupled to a multimode optical fiber cable, an effect known as differential mode delay (DMD) might

result in a degradation of the modal bandwidth of the optical fiber cable.

This degradation results in a decrease in the link span (the distance between a transmitter and a receiver)

that can be supported reliably. The effect of DMD can be overcome by conditioning the launch

characteristics of a laser source. A practical means of performing this conditioning is to use a device

called a mode-conditioning patch cord.

A mode-conditioning patch cord is an optical fiber cable assembly that consists of a pair of optical fibers

terminated with connector hardware. Specifically, the mode-conditioning patch cord is composed of a

single-mode optical fiber permanently coupled off-center (see Offset in Figure 6-11) to a graded-index

multimode optical fiber. Figure 6-11 shows a diagram of the mode-conditioning patch cord assembly.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

6-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6 NPE-G2 Overview

NPE-G2 Memory Information and Specifications

Figure 6-11

Mode-Conditioning Patch Cord for an SFP Module

The mode-conditioning patch cord assembly is composed of duplex optical fibers, including a

single-mode-to-multimode offset launch fiber connected to the transmitter, and a second conventional

graded-index multimode optical fiber connected to the receiver. The use of a plug-to-plug patch cord

maximizes the power budget of multimode 1000BASE LX and 1000BASE LH links.

The mode-conditioning patch cord is required to comply with IEEE standards. The IEEE found that link

distances could not be met with certain types of fiber-optic cable cores. The solution is to launch light

from the laser at a precise offset from the center, which is accomplished by using the mode-conditioning

patch cord. At the output of the patch cord, the SFP-GE-L= is compliant with the IEEE 802.3z standard

for 1000BASE LX.

Console and Auxiliary Port Connection Equipment

The NPE-G2 has a DCE-mode console port for connecting a console terminal, and a DTE-mode

auxiliary port for connecting a modem or other DCE device (such as a CSU/DSU or other router) to your

router. However, with an I/O controller also installed in the router, the default console and auxiliary ports

are on the I/O controller, and you cannot access the console and auxiliary ports on the NPE-G2.

Note

Both the console and the auxiliary ports are asynchronous serial ports; any devices connected to these

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

6-20

Chapter 6 NPE-G2 Overview

NPE-G2 Memory Information and Specifications

Note

When connecting to an auxiliary port on a Cisco 7200 VXR router, the port will not function at baud

rates higher than 19.2k. If the baud rate on the connecting device is set higher than 19.2k, either

garbled text or nothing will be displayed on the screen.

Refer to Table 6-13 for a list of the pins used on the RJ-45-to-DB-25 adapters, used with an RJ-45 cable,

to connect terminals and modems to the Cisco 7200 series routers. The cable you use may be a roll-over

cable or a straight cable.

Table 6-12

Pinouts for the RJ-45-to-DB-25 Adapters

Adapter

DTE M/F Pins¹

DCE M/F Pins

MMOD Pins²

1. The female data terminal equipment (FDTE) adapter that is available from Cisco is labeled “Terminal”.

2. The MMOD adapter that is available from Cisco is labeled “Modem”.

A roll-over cable can be detected by comparing the two modular ends of the cable. Holding the cables

in your hand, side-by-side, with the tab at the back, the wire connected to the pin on the outside of the

left plug should be the same color as the pin on the outside of the right plug. If your cable was purchased

from Cisco, pin 1 will be white on one connector, and pin 8 will be white on the other (a roll-over cable

reverses pins 1 and 8, 2 and 7, 3 and 6, and 4 and 5). (See Figure 6-12.)

Figure 6-12

Identifying a Roll-Over Cable

Pin 1 and pin 8

should be the

same color

Pin 1

Pin 8

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

6-21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6 NPE-G2 Overview

NPE-G2 Memory Information and Specifications

The Cisco 7200 series routers ship with a roll-over cable. Connection to a terminal or a modem requires

an RJ-45-to-DB-25 adapter, and possibly a DB-25-to-DB9 adapter. Refer to Table 6-13 for the cable and

adapter configurations that can be used to connect terminals and modems to the Cisco 7200 series

routers.

Table 6-13

Asynchronous Device Cabling Options

Access Server Port

Console or auxiliary

Auxiliary or console

RJ-45 Cable Type

Roll-over

DB-25 Adapter

FDTE¹

End Device

Terminal

Modem

Straight

FDCE

MMOD²

Roll-over

1. The FDTE RJ-45-to-DB-25 adapter is labeled “Terminal.”

2. The MMOD RJ-45-to-DB-25 adapter is labeled “Modem.”

The console and auxiliary ports are configured as asynchronous serial ports. Figure 6-13 shows the

RJ-45 console and auxiliary port connections.

Figure 6-13

Console and Auxiliary Port RJ-45 Connections

LINK

NETW

ORK PR

OCESSING ENGINE - G2

CONSOLE

COMP

CT FLASH

FE 0/2

FOR MANA

GEMENT

USE ONL

USB

SYST

TAT

CTV

PWR

Console port

Cable to console terminal or DTE

Cable to modem or DCE

Auxiliary port

RJ-45 connectors

A cable and adapter kit is available from Cisco (Cisco Product Number ACS-2500ASYN=). Table 6-12

describes the cable and adapter configurations that can be used to connect terminals and modems to the

console or the auxiliary port.

RJ-45 Console Port Signals and Pinouts

The NPE-G2 console port supports Data Carrier Detect (DCD). Table 6-14 lists the RJ-45 console port

signals for the NPE-G2.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

6-22

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6 NPE-G2 Overview

Fiber Optic Cleaning Information

Table 6-14

Console Port Signals for the NPE-G2

Pin¹

Signal

CTS

Direction

Out

—

Description

Clear To Send (tracks RTS)

Data Set Ready (always on)

Receive Data

DSR

RXD

GND

TXD

DTR

RTS

Signal Ground

Transmit Data

Data Terminal Ready

Ready To Send

1. Any pin not referenced is not connected.

RJ-45 Auxiliary Port Signals and Pinouts

Table 6-15 lists the RJ-45 auxiliary port signals for the NPE-G2.

Table 6-15

Auxiliary Port Signals for the NPE-G2

Pin¹Signal

Direction

Out

Description

RTS

Ready To Send

Data Terminal Ready

Transmit Data

Ring Indication

Signal Ground

Receive Data

DTR

TXD

RING²

GND

RXD

—

7³

DSR/DCD(RLSD) In

Data Set Ready/Data Carrier Detect (Receive Line Signal

Detect)

CTS In

Clear To Send (tracks RTS)

1. Any pin not referenced is not connected.

2. RING is not supported on Cisco-supplied adapters. To use this pin, you must create a customized cable.

3. Pin 7 can be used as a DCD input for connection to a modem. The RJ-45-to-DB-25F adapter maps DCD to this pin when

used with a straight-through cable.

Fiber Optic Cleaning Information

We strongly recommend cleaning all optical fiber connections before reconnecting optical cables to

equipment. For information about cleaning optical connectors, see the Inspection and Cleaning

Procedures for Fiber-Optic Connections document and the Compressed Air Cleaning Issues for

Fiber-Optic Connections document.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

6-23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6 NPE-G2 Overview

Fiber Optic Cleaning Information

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

6-24

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C H A P T E R

NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and

Configuration Information

This chapter provides information on installing and configuring the NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 and contains

the following sections:

•

Preparing for an Upgrade, page 7-2

Copying the Configuration File, page 7-4

Removing the Network Processing Engine, page 7-7

Installing the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2, page 7-18

Enabling the Second Processor on the NPE-G1, page 7-46

Copying the Saved Configuration to NVRAM, page 7-52

Auxiliary and Console Port Information, page 7-56

Configuring the Native Gigabit Ethernet Interfaces, page 7-56

Using show Commands to Check the Installation, page 7-59

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-1

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Preparing for an Upgrade

Tip

Before you begin any removal or installation procedure, read Chapter 8, “Preparation for Installation.”

Also, for the NPE-G1, see the NPE-G1 Read Me First document, at the following URL:

http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/routers/ps341/prod_installation_guide09186a00805e396a.ht

For the Cisco uBR7200-NPE-G1, see the Cisco uBR7200-NPE-G1 Read Me First document, at the

following URL:

http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/cable/ps2217/prod_pre_installation_guide09186a008017bde

6.html

Preparing for an Upgrade

Note

Cisco IOS Release 12.2 changed the behavior of the ROM monitor (ROMmon) during the bootup

sequence. See the “Boot Changes in Cisco IOS Release 12.2” section on page 10-2 for more information.

Upgrading to the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 is a different procedure than previous processor upgrades because

of the following considerations:

•

The NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 contain an I/O controller, which includes the bootflash and NVRAM

memory. After you install the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 in a chassis, you can no longer access the

bootflash and NVRAM on the I/O controller. You therefore must make the existing Cisco IOS

software image and configuration files available to the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2, either by putting these

files on a CompactFlash Disk or on a TFTP server.

The NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 include three Gigabit Ethernet interfaces. If you want to use these

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-2

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Preparing for an Upgrade

Before you install an NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 in an existing router and remove the existing processor and

I/O controller, do the following:

Step 1

Step 2

Copy the configuration file from the existing router to a TFTP server, Flash Disk, or PC Card. See the

“Copying the Configuration File” section on page 7-4 for details.

Modify the configuration file to accommodate the new Gigabit Ethernet interfaces on the NPE-G1 or

NPE-G2. If you are also planning to remove the I/O controller, also remove the configuration lines for

the Ethernet or Fast Ethernet interfaces on the I/O controller. See the “Configuring the Native Gigabit

Ethernet Interfaces” section on page 7-56 for guidelines.

Step 3

Copy the modified configuration file to a CompactFlash Disk that can be used on the NPE-G1 or

NPE-G2. If you are not planning on removing the existing I/O controller, you can do this by copying the

configuration to a Flash Disk, as described in Step 1, before you install the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2. Then

you can keep the Flash Disk in the I/O controller and copy it to a CompactFlash Disk in the NPE-G1 or

NPE-G2 after you have finished installing the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2.

If you are planning on removing the existing I/O controller, you can copy the configuration file to a

CompactFlash Disk in the following ways:

•

Copy the configuration file to a TFTP server and then copy it to a CompactFlash Disk on an existing

NPE-G1 or NPE-G2.

•

Copy the configuration file to a Type 2 Flash Disk using the existing I/O controller, as described in

the “Copying the Configuration File to a Flash Disk or PC Card” section on page 7-4. Then use a

multi-function reader that accommodates both Type 1 CompactFlash Disk and Type 2 Flash Disk

memory cards to transfer the configuration file to the CompactFlash Disk.

•

Use a Type 1-to-Type 2 adapter to convert the CompactFlash Disk to the Flash Disk form factor.

Then insert the CompactFlash Disk and adapter into the existing I/O controller and copy the

configuration file to it, as described in Step 1.

Note

The CompactFlash Disk must be formatted before you can write any files to it. The

CompactFlash Disk shipped with the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 is already formatted, but a spare

CompactFlash Disk must be formatted using the format command. Do not format the

CompactFlash Disk in a PC or other workstation because the router cannot use CompactFlash

Disks that are formatted by other computers. After the CompactFlash Disk is properly formatted,

however, you can write to it using any PC or workstation that recognizes Type 2 CompactFlash

Disk memory.

Step 4

(Optional) Copy the proper Cisco IOS software image (see Table 8-4 on page 8-4) to the CompactFlash

Disk, using the same technique you used to copy the configuration file in Step 3. You do not need to

perform this step if you plan to boot the router from a TFTP server, but you must add the proper boot

configuration command to the configuration file when you modify it in Step 2.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Copying the Configuration File

Step 3

Step 4

Make sure you are at the privileged level of the EXEC command interpreter (check the system prompt

for a pound sign [#]). If the system prompt does not have a pound sign (#), enter enable, and then your

password.

Enter the show running-config command to display the router’s running configuration. Ensure that the

configuration information is complete and correct. If it is not, use the configure command to add or

modify the existing configuration. Then enter the copy running-config command. If you have a Flash

Disk 0 or 1, use disk0 or disk1 as part of the command. If you are using a PC Card, use slot0 or slot1

as part of the command.

Step 5

To copy the running configuration file to the Flash Disk or PC Card, enter the copy running-config

disk0: filename or copy running-config slot0: filename command:

System# copy running-config disk0: filename

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-5

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Copying the Configuration File

Step 4

Enter the copy startup-config tftp command. The EXEC command interpreter prompts you for the

name or IP address of the remote host that is to receive the configuration file. (The prompt might

include the name or address of a default file server.)

Router# copy startup-config tftp

Remote host []?

Step 5

Step 6

Enter the name or IP address of the remote host. In the following example, the name of the remote host

is servername:

Router# copy startup-config tftp

Remote host []? servername

Translating "servername"...domain server (10.1.1.1) [OK]

The EXEC command interpreter prompts you for the name of the file that will contain the configuration.

By default, the system appends -confg to the router’s name to create the new filename. Press Return to

accept the default filename, or enter a different name for the file before pressing Return. In the following

example, the default is accepted:

Name of configuration file to write [Router-confg]?

Write file Router-confg on host 10.1.1.1? [confirm]

Writing Router-confg.....

Step 7

Before the router executes the copy process, it displays the instructions you entered for confirmation. If

the instructions are not correct, enter n (no), and then press Return to stop the process. To accept the

instructions, press Return, or y and then press Return; the system begins the copy process. In the

following example, the default is accepted:

Write file Router-confg on host 10.1.1.1? [confirm]

Writing Router-confg: !!!! [ok]

While the router copies the configuration to the remote host, it displays a series of exclamation points

(! ! !) or periods (. . .). The !!!! and [ok] indicate that the operation is successful. A display of . . . [timed

out] or [failed] indicates a failure, which would probably be because of a network fault or the lack of a

writable, readable file on the remote file server.

Step 8

Check the result of the copy process.

•

If the display indicates that the process was successful (with the series of exclamation points [! ! !]

and [ok]), the copy process is complete. The configuration file is safely stored in the temporary file

on the remote file server.

•

If the display indicates that the process failed (with the series of periods [. . .] as shown in the

following example), your configuration was not saved:

Writing Router-confg .....

Step 9

If your configuration was not saved, repeat the preceding steps, or select a different remote file server

and repeat the preceding steps. If you are unable to copy the configuration to a remote host

successfully, contact your network administrator or see the “Obtaining Documentation and Submitting

a Service Request” section on page iv for instructions on contacting technical assistance.

This completes the procedure for copying the configuration file to a TFTP server. Proceed to “Removing

the Network Processing Engine” section on page 7-7.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Removing the Network Processing Engine

Copying the Configuration File Using a PC

Complete the following steps to copy the router’s configuration file to a text file on a PC connected to

the router’s console port.

Step 1

Connect a serial port on the PC to the router’s console port. Start a terminal program on the PC and

configure it for the same baud rate, parity, and stop-bits that the console port is using.

Step 2

Step 3

Turn on the terminal program’s capture buffer so that it will save all output to a text file.

Enter the show startup-config command in privileged EXEC mode to display the router’s startup

configuration.

Note

Refer to the appropriate software documentation listed in the “Related Documentation” section

on page iii for descriptions of the configuration options available for the system and individual

interfaces, and for specific configuration instructions.

Step 4

Step 5

When the router has completed displaying the configuration, turn off the terminal program’s capture

buffer and save the configuration file to the disk on the PC.

(Optional) Use a text editor on the PC to modify the configuration, as needed.

This completes the procedure for copying the configuration file to a PC. Proceed to “Removing the

Network Processing Engine” section on page 7-7.

Removing the Network Processing Engine

Before you begin any removal or installation procedure, read Chapter 8, “Preparation for Installation.”

To install the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2, follow the instructions in this chapter for removal of an existing

network processing engine or network services engine and installation of the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2.

Note

If you are removing the I/O controller, and do not plan to replace it, you must install an I/O controller

blank panel (Cisco Product Number IO-CONTROLR-BLANK=) in the I/O controller slot. See the

Input/Output Controller Replacement Instructions for information on removing an I/O controller and

installing an I/O controller blank panel.

If you are installing a Port Adapter Jacket Card, see the Port Adapter Jacket Card Installation Guide for

installation information.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Removing the Network Processing Engine

Ensuring Easy Access to the Router

If your Cisco 7200 VXR router or Cisco uBR7200 series router is installed in a standard 19-inch, 4-post

or telco-type rack, cables from other equipment in the rack might obstruct access to the rear of the router.

Also, rack power strips or other permanent fixtures may obstruct access to the router. Review the

following guidelines to ensure easy access to the rear of the router when it is installed in a rack. This is

particularly important because the NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 have interfaces that require cabling on the rear

of the router.

If the router is not installed in a rack, or if you already have clear access to the rear of the router, proceed

to the “Powering Down the Router and Disconnecting Input Power” section on page 7-8.

Use the following guidelines to ensure easy access to the rear of the router when it is installed in a rack:

•

Ensure that you have at least 3 to 4 feet (0.91 to 1.22 meters) of working space at the rear of the

router.

•

If cables from other equipment in the rack fall in front of the rear end of the router, carefully gather

the cables (using care not to strain or stress them) and use cable ties to anchor them away from the

rear of the router.

•

If access to the rear of the router is partially blocked by a power strip or some other permanent rack

fixture, detach the router from the rack and carefully slide it forward until there is enough clearance

to remove the power supply, the network processing engine, and the subchassis from the router.

Caution

Make sure that at least one other person is available to support the front of the router as you slide it out

from the rack and, if necessary, to continue to support it while you remove and insert the power supply,

network processing engine, or subchassis.

Powering Down the Router and Disconnecting Input Power

Complete the steps in the following sections to power down the router and disconnect input power.

Warning

This unit might have more than one power cord. To reduce the risk of electric shock, disconnect the

two power cords before servicing. Statement 83

Powering Down the Router

To power down a Cisco 7200 VXR router or Cisco uBR7200 series router, complete the following steps:

Note

Before powering down the router, use the copy running-config startup-config command to save the

router’s running configuration to a Flash Disk, PC Card, TFTP server, or PC. If you do not, you will have

to manually re-enter the configuration after you install the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 and power on the router.

See the “Copying the Configuration File” section on page 7-4.

Step 1

Facing the rear of the router, place the power switch on the power supply in the off (O) position. Repeat

this action if a second power supply is installed in the router.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Removing the Network Processing Engine

Note

When powering off the router, wait a minimum of 30 seconds before powering it on again.

Step 2

Observe the following items:

•

The green OK LED on the power supply turns off.

The fans stop operating.

The LEDs on the I/O controller turn off.

The LEDs on the port adapters turn off.

Caution

When the power switch on a Cisco uBR7200 series power supply is turned to the off (O) position, the

power supply enters a reset cycle for 90 seconds. Wait at least 90 seconds before turning the power

switch back to the on (|) position. If you do not wait the full 90 seconds, the power supply does not

restart.

This completes the procedure for powering down the router. The following sections provide instructions

on disconnecting power from the Cisco 7200 VXR routers and Cisco uBR7200 series routers:

•

Disconnecting AC-Input Power from a Cisco 7200 VXR Router, page 7-9

Disconnecting AC-Input Power from a Cisco uBR7246VXR Router, page 7-10

Disconnecting AC-Input Power from a Cisco uBR7225VXR Router, page 7-11

Disconnecting DC-Input Power from a Cisco 7200 VXR Router, page 7-11

Disconnecting DC-Input Power from a Cisco uBR7246VXR Router, page 7-13

Disconnecting AC-Input Power from a Cisco 7200 VXR Router

To disconnect AC-input power from a Cisco 7200 VXR router, complete the following steps:

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

Unplug the input power cable from the power source.

Push up on the cable-retention clip that secures the input power cable to the router power supply.

Unplug the other end of the input power cable from the power supply. See Figure 7-1.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Removing the Network Processing Engine

Figure 7-1

Disconnecting Power from a Cisco 7200 VXR Router AC-Input Power Supply

NETWORK PROCESSING ENGINE

-300

AC-input receptacle

Internal fans

Power switch

AC-input power supply

Step 4

Repeat Step 1 through Step 3 if a second power supply is installed.

This completes the procedure for disconnecting AC-input power from a Cisco 7200 VXR router. Go to

the “Removing the NPE or NSE-1” section on page 7-16.

Disconnecting AC-Input Power from a Cisco uBR7246VXR Router

To disconnect AC-input power from a Cisco uBR7246VXR router, complete the following steps:

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

Unplug the input power cable from the power source.

Push the cable-retention clip that secures the input power cable to the router power supply to the left.

Unplug the other end of the input power cable from the power supply. See Figure 7-2.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-10

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Removing the Network Processing Engine

Figure 7-2

Disconnecting Power from a Cisco uBR7246VXR AC-Input Power Supply

AC-input receptacle

Power switch

Handle

Network processing engine

AC-input power supply

Step 4

Repeat Step 1 through Step 3 if a second power supply is installed.

This completes the procedure for disconnecting AC-input power from a Cisco uBR7246VXR router. Go

to the “Removing the NPE or NSE-1” section on page 7-16.

Disconnecting AC-Input Power from a Cisco uBR7225VXR Router

To disconnect AC-input power from a Cisco uBR7225VXR router, complete the following steps:

Step 1

Step 2

Unplug the input power cable from the power source.

Unplug the other end of the input power cable from the power supply.

Note

The Cisco uBR7225VXR router power supply does not have a cable retention-clip.

Disconnecting DC-Input Power from a Cisco 7200 VXR Router

To disconnect DC-input power from a Cisco 7200 VXR router, complete the following steps.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Removing the Network Processing Engine

Warning

Before completing any of the following steps, and to prevent short-circuit or shock hazards, ensure

that power is removed from the DC circuit. To ensure that all power is OFF, locate the circuit breaker

on the panel board that services the DC circuit, switch the circuit breaker to the OFF position, and

tape the switch handle of the circuit breaker in the OFF position. Statement 332

When you install the unit, the ground connection must always be made first and disconnected last.

Statement 42

Step 1

Step 2

At the rear of the router, check that the power switch on the power supply is in the off (O) position. (For

the Cisco 7200 VXR routers, see Figure 7-3.)

Ensure that no current is running through the –V and +V leads. To ensure that all power is off, locate the

circuit breaker on the panel board that services the DC circuit, switch the circuit breaker to the off

position, and tape the switch handle of the circuit breaker in the off position.

Step 3

Disconnect the –V and +V leads. You can leave the ground cable connected.

For a Cisco 7200 VXR router, remove the cable tie that secures the –V, +V, and ground leads to the power

supply faceplate. Save the cable tie.

Note

The cable tie that accompanied your Cisco 7200 VXR router DC-input power supply can be

removed and replaced on the power supply without the use of a tool. If you secured the DC-input

power supply leads to the power supply faceplate using a different type of cable tie, use a wire

stripper to cut that cable tie from the power supply.

Figure 7-3

Disconnecting Power from a Cisco 7200 VXR Router DC-Input Power Supply

networking xxxx engine

DC-input receptacle

Internal fans

Power switch

DC-input power supply

Step 4

Using a 3/16-inch flat-blade screwdriver, loosen the screw below the +V lead receptacle and pull the lead

from the connector. See Figure 7-3.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-12

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Removing the Network Processing Engine

Step 5

Repeat this step for the –V lead and the ground lead.

Note

The color coding of the DC-input power supply leads depends on the color coding of the DC

power source at your site. Typically, green or green and yellow are used for ground. Make certain

that the lead color coding you choose for the DC-input power supply matches the lead color

coding used at the DC power source.

Step 6

Repeat Step 1 through Step 6 if a second power supply is installed.

This completes the procedure for disconnecting DC-input power from a Cisco 7200 VXR router. Go to

the “Removing the NPE or NSE-1” section on page 7-16.

Disconnecting DC-Input Power from a Cisco uBR7246VXR Router

To disconnect DC-input power from a Cisco uBR7246VXR router, complete the following steps.

Warning

Before completing any of the following steps, and to prevent short-circuit or shock hazards, ensure

that power is removed from the DC circuit. To ensure that all power is OFF, locate the circuit breaker

on the panel board that services the DC circuit, switch the circuit breaker to the OFF position, and

tape the switch handle of the circuit breaker in the OFF position. Statement 322

Warning

When you install the unit, the ground connection must always be made first and disconnected last.

Statement 42

Step 1

Step 2

At the rear of the router, check that the power switch on the power supply is in the off (O) position.

Ensure that no current is running through the –V and +V leads. To ensure that all power is off, locate the

circuit breaker on the panel board that services the DC circuit, switch the circuit breaker to the off

position, and tape the switch handle of the circuit breaker in the off position.

Step 3

Use a 7-mm wrench or nut driver (or adjustable wrench) to loosen and remove the two M4 nuts from the

strain-relief cover that secures the –V and the +V leads to the power supply faceplate. See Figure

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Removing the Network Processing Engine

Figure 7-4

Removing the Strain-Relief Cover from a Cisco uBR7246VXR Router DC-Input Power

Supply

Power switch

–V lead

+V lead

Power receptacle

Captive screw

Strain-relief cover

M4 nuts and studs

M5 grounding receptacles

M5 grounding lug

Step 4

Using a 3/16-inch flat-blade screwdriver, loosen the screw below the +V lead receptacle and pull the lead

from the connector. Repeat this step for the –V lead only. See Figure 7-5.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-14

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Removing the Network Processing Engine

Figure 7-5

Disconnecting Power from a Cisco uBR7246VXR DC-Input Power Supply

Power switch

Power receptacle

–V lead

M4 studs

+V lead

Handle

DC Power supply

M5 grounding receptacles

M5 grounding lug

Step 5

Using an 8-mm wrench or nut driver (or adjustable wrench), loosen and remove the two M5 nuts that

secure the two-hole grounding lug to the grounding receptacle, and pull the grounding lug and lead from

the receptacle.

Note

The color coding of the DC-input power supply leads depends on the color coding of the DC

power source at your site. Typically, green or green and yellow are used for ground. Make certain

that the lead color coding you choose for the DC-input power supply matches the lead color

coding used at the DC power source.

Step 6

Repeat the steps above to disconnect a secure power supply.

This completes the procedure for disconnecting DC-input power from a Cisco uBR7246VXR router. Go

to the following section, “Removing the NPE or NSE-1.”

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Removing the Network Processing Engine

Removing the NPE or NSE-1

To remove the NPE or NSE-1 from a Cisco 7200 VXR router, a Cisco uBR7246VXR or a Cisco

UBR7225VXR router complete the following steps.

Note

The weight of installed power supplies in your Cisco 7200 VXR or Cisco uBR7246VXR router might

make it difficult to remove the network processing engine. If you have difficulty, first remove the power

supplies from the chassis, and then remove the network processing engine. See the “Removing and

Replacing an AC-Input or DC-Input Power Supply” section on page 10-14 for information on removing

and replacing an installed power supply.

Note

If you have difficulty installing a network processing engine or I/O controller in the lowest slot of a Cisco

7200 VXR router that is rack-mounted, remove the port adapters, network processing engine and I/O

controller from the chassis and reinstall them. Install the network processing engine and I/O controller

in the lowest slots first, then populate the slots above them, in a bottom-to-top order.

Step 1

Power down the router and disconnect the input power cable. (See the “Powering Down the Router and

Disconnecting Input Power” section on page 7-8.)

Step 2

Step

Attach an ESD-preventive wrist strap between you and an unfinished chassis surface.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-16

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Removing the Network Processing Engine

Figure 7-6

Cisco 7200 VXR Router NPE Captive Installation Screws and Handle

NETWORK PROCESSING ENGINE-300

Captive installation screw

Handle

Network processing engine or network

services engine

AC-input power supply

Step 4

Using a 3/16-inch flat-blade screwdriver, loosen the screws that secure the router to the front mounting

strips of the rack.

Step 5

Step 6

Position at least one person in front of the rack to support the front underside of the router.

From the rear of the rack, carefully push the front of the router out of the rack until there is enough

clearance to remove the network processing engine.

Step 7

Grasp the network processing engine handle and carefully pull the network processing engine from its

chassis slot.

Caution

Step 8

Handle the network processing engine by the carrier edges and handle only; never touch the printed

circuit board components or connector pins.

Place the NPE on an antistatic surface with its printed circuit board components facing upward, or in a

static shielding bag. If you are returning the network processing engine to the factory, immediately place

it in a static shielding bag.

This completes the procedure for removing an installed NPE. For instructions on installing the NPE-G1

or NPE-G2, go to the “Installing the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2” section on page 7-18.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Installing the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2

To install the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 in the router, use the following procedures:

Basic Guidelines, page 7-18

Installing a CompactFlash Disk, page 7-19

•

Installing a USB Flash Memory Module or eToken—NPE-G2, page 7-19

Installing an SFP Module—NPE-G2, page 7-20

Installing a GBIC—NPE-G1, page 7-23

Replacing the DIMM on the NPE-G2, page 7-24

Upgrading the SDRAM SODIMMs on the NPE-G1 (Optional), page 7-26

Inserting the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 into the Router, page 7-28

Attaching the Rear Cable-Management Brackets and Cables (Optional), page 7-29

Reconnecting Input Power and Powering Up the Router, page 7-35

Basic Guidelines

Note

If you have difficulty installing a network processing engine or I/O controller in the lowest slot of a Cisco

7200 VXR router that is rack-mounted, remove the port adapters, network processing engine and I/O

controller from the chassis and reinstall them. Install the network processing engine and I/O controller

in the lowest slots first, then populate the slots above them, in a bottom-to-top order.

Use the following guidelines when installing the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2:

Step 1

Ensure that the router is powered down and the input power cable is disconnected from the router and

the power source. See the “Powering Down the Router and Disconnecting Input Power” section on

page 7-8.

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Attach an ESD-preventive wrist strap between you and an unfinished chassis surface.

Remove the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 from its static shielding bag.

When touching the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2, use both hands, grasp the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 by its metal

carrier edges, and orient it so that its printed circuit board components face upward.

Caution

Handle the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 by the carrier edges and handle only; never touch the printed circuit

board components or connector pins.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-18

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Installing the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2

Installing a CompactFlash Disk

Use the following instructions to install the CompactFlash Disk.

Figure 7-7

Installing a CompactFlash Disk

ORK PR

OCESSING ENGINE

ORK PR

OCESSING ENGINE

ORK PR

OCESSING ENGINE

FLAS

FLA

LAS

Inserting the CompactFlash Disk

Removing the CompactFlash Disk

Pressing the ejector button to release the

CompactFlash Disk

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

Turn the CompactFlash Disk so that the label is facing down.

Slide the CompactFlash Disk into the CompactFlash Disk slot.

To remove the CompactFlash Disk, push the ejector button, and gently pull the CompactFlash Disk from

its slot.

You are finished installing the CompactFlash Disk. For more information on using the CompactFlash

Disk, see Using the Flash Disk at the following URL:

http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/routers/ps341/prod_installation_guide09186a00802a6394.ht

For instructions on installing an SFP module in the NPE-G2, go to the “Installing an SFP

Module—NPE-G2” section on page 7-20.

For instructions on installing a Gigabit Interface Converter (GBIC) in the NPE-G1, go to the “Installing

a GBIC—NPE-G1” section on page 7-23.

Installing a USB Flash Memory Module or eToken—NPE-G2

To connect a Cisco USB Flash memory module or the Aladdin USB eToken Pro key to the NPE-G2 USB

port, simply insert the module into the port as shown in Figure 7-8. The USB Flash memory module can

be inserted in only one way, and can be inserted or removed regardless of whether the router is powered

up or not.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Installing the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2

Caution

Note

Do not remove a USB Flash memory module when a read or write operation to the USB Flash memory

module is in progress. The router might reload, or the USB Flash memory module can be damaged.

Only Cisco USB Flash memory modules and the Aladdin USB eToken Pro key are supported by Cisco

routers.

Figure 7-8

Connecting a USB Flash Memory Module to a Router USB Port

LINK

FE 0/2

FOR MANA

GEMENT

USE ONL

USB

Note

For detailed information about the Cisco IOS commands that support USB Flash memory modules, see

the Cisco USB eToken and USB Flash Features Support document.

Go to the “Inserting the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 into the Router” section on page 7-28 for instructions on

installing the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 in the chassis.

Installing an SFP Module—NPE-G2

Note

The SFP module is a separately orderable part and ships installed in your NPE-G2. However, if you are

adding a SFP module, you must install the SFP module before you connect the cables to it. We strongly

recommend cleaning optical cable connectors before connecting them to the SFP modules. See the

“Fiber Optic Cleaning Information” section on page 7-67.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-20

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Installing the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2

Figure 7-9 Types of SFP Module Latches

Note

The SFP module must be installed before you connect the cables to it.

The SPF module has three types of latches, which are also the removal mechanism. See Figure 7-9. There

is no correlation of the type of latch to the model (such as SX or LH) or technology type (such as Gigabit

Ethernet) of SFP modules. Always read the label on the SFP module to determine the technology type,

and model. You can install and remove Gigabit Ethernet SFP modules with power on to the system.

Disconnect all cables before removing or installing a Gigabit Ethernet SFP module. We strongly

recommend that you do not install or remove the SFP module with optical fiber cables attached to it. SFP

modules are keyed to prevent incorrect insertion.

Warning

Invisible laser radiation may be emitted from disconnected fibers or connectors. Do not stare into

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-21

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Installing the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2

Figure 7-10 Inserting an SFP Module into the NPE-G2 Gigabit Ethernet Port 0/1

Use the following procedure to install an SFP module in the NPE-G2:

Step 1

Step 2

Attach an ESD-preventive wrist strap between you and an unpainted chassis surface.

Locate the label on the SFP module and turn the SFP module so the label is on top and the alignment

groove is down.

Note

The SFP module is keyed so that it cannot be inserted incorrectly.

Step 3

Step 4

Insert the SFP module into SFP port 0/1, 0/2, or 0/3. The SFP module snaps into place when you have

completely and properly inserted it.

Repeat Step 2 if you are inserting a second or third SFP module.

Note

Do not remove the plug from the SFP module optical bores until you are ready to install the network

interface optical fiber cable. Save the plug for future use.

We strongly recommend cleaning all optical fiber connections before connecting optical cables to

equipment. For information about cleaning optical connectors, see the Inspection and Cleaning

Procedures for Fiber-Optic Connections document and the Compressed Air Cleaning Issues for

Fiber-Optic Connections document.

This completes the SFP module installation procedure. For information on inserting the NPE-G2 into the

chassis, see the “Inserting the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 into the Router” section on page 7-28

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-22

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Installing the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2

Installing a GBIC—NPE-G1

Use the instructions in this section to install a GBIC in the NPE-G1.

Figure 7-11

Installing a GBIC in the NPE-G1

E T H E R N E T 0 / 1

G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T 0 / 2

L I N K

R X

G B I C

T X

E N

R J 4 5

R X

G B I C

GBIC

GBIC port 0/2

Plug

Alignment groove

GBIC port 0/1

Step 1

Step 2

Turn the GBIC so the label side is up and the alignment groove is down.

Note

The GBIC is keyed so that it cannot be inserted incorrectly.

Insert the GBIC into GBIC port 0/1, 0/2, or 0/3. Repeat this step if you are installing more than one

GBIC.

Note

Do not remove the GBIC plugs until you are ready to install the cables.

You are finished installing the GBICs. For more information on cabling or specifications, see the

“Gigabit Ethernet GBIC Connection Equipment” section on page 5-13.

Note

We strongly recommend cleaning all optical fiber connections before connecting optical cables to

equipment. For information about cleaning optical connectors, see the Inspection and Cleaning

Procedures for Fiber-Optic Connections document and the Compressed Air Cleaning Issues for

Fiber-Optic Connections document.

Go to the “Inserting the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 into the Router” section on page 7-28 for instructions on

installing the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 in the chassis.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Installing the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2

Replacing the DIMM on the NPE-G2

To replace the DIMM on the NPE-G2, use the following instructions:

Step 1

Locate the DIMM on the NPE-G2. See Figure 7-12.

Figure 7-12

Locating the DIMM on the NPE-G2

DIMM

Step 2

Step 3

Remove the DIMM by pressing against the DIMM latches until the DIMM releases.

Gently remove it from the DIMM socket.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-24

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Installing the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2

Figure 7-13

Installing or Removing the DIMM on the NPE-G2

Step 4

Step 5

Gently insert a DIMM into the DIMM socket.

Push the release latches until they slip into the notch on the edge of the DIMM, holding it securely in

place.

You have finished replacing the DIMM. To install the NPE-G2 in the chassis, go to the “Inserting the

NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 into the Router” section on page 7-28.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Installing the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2

Upgrading the SDRAM SODIMMs on the NPE-G1 (Optional)

If you have purchased an SDRAM memory upgrade for the NPE-G1, replace the SDRAM SODIMMs

on the NPE-G1 using the following instructions.

Removing a SODIMM

Step 1

Locate the SODIMMs on the NPE-G1.

Figure 7-14 Locating the SODIMMs on the NPE-G1

NETWORK PROCESSING ENGINE

POWER

PAC

CONSOLE

AUX

SODIMM 2

SODIMM 1

Note

Both SODIMMs must be of the same size and type, and both SODIMM sockets must be populated.

Step 2

Remove the SODIMM you want to replace by pulling outward on the SODIMM spring latches with your

thumbs.

The SODIMM springs up to allow you to easily pull it from the socket.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-26

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Installing the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2

Figure 7-15

Removing or Installing an SDRAM SODIMM

SODIMM

Step 3

Step 4

Remove the SODIMM from the socket. Avoid touching the SODIMM as much as possible, particularly

the traces, the metal fingers on the connector side of the SODIMM.

Place the SODIMM in an antistatic shielding bag.

Installing a SDRAM SODIMM

Caution

SODIMMs are sensitive components that are susceptible to ESD damage. Handle SODIMMs by the

edges only; avoid touching the memory modules, pins, or traces (the metal fingers along the connector

edge of the SODIMM).

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

Remove a new SODIMM from the antistatic container.

Hold the SODIMM component-side-up, with the connector edge (the metal fingers) away from you.

Align the new SODIMM notch with the connector and insert the SODIMM into the socket.

Caution

Step 4

When inserting the SODIMM, use firm but not excessive pressure. If you damage a socket, you will have

to return the NPE-G1 to the factory for repair.

Gently press on the SODIMM until the SODIMM spring latches snap into place.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Installing the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2

Step 5

If the SODIMM appears misaligned, carefully remove it and reseat it in the socket. Push the SODIMM

gently back into the socket until the spring latches snap into place.

You have finished replacing the SDRAM SODIMM. To install the NPE-G1 in the chassis, go to the

“Inserting the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 into the Router” section on page 7-28.

Inserting the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 into the Router

Note

If you have difficulty installing a network processing engine or I/O controller in the lowest slot of a Cisco

7200 VXR router that is rack-mounted, remove the port adapters, network processing engine and I/O

controller from the chassis and reinstall them. Install the network processing engine and I/O controller

in the lowest slots first, then populate the slots above them, in a bottom-to-top order.

To insert the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 into the router, follow the instructions in this section:

Step 1

Align the left and right edges of the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 with the chassis slot guides. Figure 7-16 shows

an NPE-G1 being installed into a Cisco 7200 VXR router; inserting an NPE-G2 is similar. Inserting a

Cisco uBR7200-NPE-G1 or Cisco uBR7200-NPE-G2 in a Cisco uBR7200 series router is similar.

Figure 7-16

Aligning the NPE-G1 Between the Slot Guides on a Cisco 7200 VXR Router

NETWORK PR

OCESSING ENGINE

POWER

CONSOLE

AUX

Slot guides

NPE-G1

Printed circuit board

Metal carrier

Step 2

Step 3

Gently slide the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 all the way into its chassis slot until you feel the connectors seat

with the router midplane.

Seat the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 in the router midplane by tightening its captive installation screws with a

number 2 Phillips or a 3/16-inch flat-blade screwdriver.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-28

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Installing the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2

Note

The NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 is not fully seated in the router midplane until you tighten its captive

installation screws.

Step 4

If you removed power supplies from the router, replace the power supplies. (See the “Removing and

Replacing an AC-Input or DC-Input Power Supply” section on page 10-14 when replacing a power

supply in a Cisco 7200 VXR router.)

Step 5

Step 6

If you slid the front of the router out of the rack, slowly guide the router back into the rack.

Use a 3/16-inch flat-blade screwdriver to tighten the screws that secure the router to the front mounting

strips of the rack.

This completes the procedure for installing the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 in a Cisco 7200 VXR router.

Attaching the Rear Cable-Management Brackets and Cables (Optional)

You may choose to use one of two types of cable-management brackets. One type is the same as is used

on the front of the router for managing port adapter and I/O controller cables. The NPE-G1- or

NPE-G2-specific bracket is used only on the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2, and provides more support for optical

fiber cables.

Depending on whether the router is front-mounted or rear-mounted in the rack, install the

cable-management brackets to the router. Go to one of these sections for instructions on rear-mounting

the cable-management brackets and attaching the cables:

•

Installing the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 Cable-Management Brackets, page 7-29—This procedure applies

to both the Cisco 7200 VXR routers and Cisco uBR7200 series routers.

Installing the Rear Cable-Management Brackets on a Front-Mounted Router (Optional),

page 7-31—This procedure applies to only the Cisco 7200 VXR routers.

Installing the Rear Cable-Management Brackets on a Rear-Mounted Router (Optional),

page 7-32—This procedure applies to only the Cisco 7200 VXR routers.

Installing the Default Cable-Management Bracket on a Cisco uBR7246VXR Router (Optional),

page 7-34—This procedure applies to only the Cisco UBR 7246VXR universal broadband router.

Installing the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 Cable-Management Brackets

If you are using the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 and installing the cable-management bracket (Cisco Product

Number MAS-7200-CBLMGMT), use the following instructions. Figure 7-17 illustrates installing the

bracket on the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 on the Cisco 7200 VXR routers. Figure 7-18 illustrates installing the

bracket on the Cisco uBR7200-NPE-G1 or Cisco uBR7200-NPE-G2 on the Cisco uBR7200 series

routers.

Note

The captive installation screws on the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 must be fastened to allow the

cable-management bracket to provide proper cable support and strain relief. Always ensure that the

captive installation screws are properly tightened.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Installing the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2

Note

Do not use the cable-management bracket as a handle for inserting and removing the NPE-G1 or

NPE-G2 in the chassis. You must always first unfasten the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 captive installation

screws and remove the cable-management bracket before removing or inserting the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2

in the chassis.

Figure 7-17

Installing the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 Cable-Management Bracket

NETWOR NETWORK PROCESSING ENGINE-300

PROCESSING EN

GINE

POWER

PAC

CONSOLE

AUX

Captive installation screw

Figure 7-18

Installing the Cisco uBR7200-NPE-G1 or Cisco uBR7200-NPE-G2 Cable-Management

Bracket

NETWORK

ROCESSING

NGINE

POWER

AUX

CONSOLE

Captive installation screw

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-30

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Installing the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2

Step 1

Step 2

Loosen the left and right captive installation screws on the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2.

Hold the cable-management bracket so that it is positioned above the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 captive

installation screws as shown in Figure 7-17 and Figure 7-18. The bracket is properly positioned when

the horizontally-faced notch is at the left, the vertically-faced notch is at the right, and the bracket’s outer

edge is flush with the edge on the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2. If you reverse the bracket so that it is not flush

with the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2, you will not be able to access the GBIC or SFP module connectors on the

NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 front panel.

Step 3

Step 4

Slide the left end of the bracket between the captive installation screw and the front panel of the NPE-G1

or NPE-G2.

Rotate the cable-management bracket down, until its other notch slides behind the right captive

installation screw. Make sure the bracket’s outer edge is flush with the edge of the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2

and does not obstruct the GBIC or SFP ports.

Step 5

Step 6

Tighten both captive installation screws.

Install the cables, and fasten them to the bracket with the velcro straps provided.

Installing the Rear Cable-Management Brackets on a Front-Mounted Router (Optional)

Use the instructions in this section to attach the cable-management brackets to a front-mounted

Cisco 7200 VXR router.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Installing the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2

Figure 7-19

Installing the Rear Cable-Management Brackets with an NPE-G1 or NPE-G2—Router

Front-Mounted

NETWORK PR

OCESSING

NGINE

POWER

CONSOLE

AUX

Screws

Step 1

If the back of the router protrudes from the rack, place the cable-management brackets against the router

as shown in Figure 7-19.

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Insert two screws into each bracket, and tighten them to the router.

Insert the GBIC, SFP module, or RJ-45 cables into the interface ports on the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2.

Place the cables through the cable-management brackets.

You have finished installing the cable-management brackets. Go to the “Reconnecting Input Power and

Powering Up the Router” section on page 7-35.

Installing the Rear Cable-Management Brackets on a Rear-Mounted Router (Optional)

Use the instructions in this section to attach the cable-management brackets if you have a rear-mounted

Cisco 7200 VXR router.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-32

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Installing the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2

Figure 7-20

Installing the Rear Cable-Management Brackets with the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2—Router

Rear-Mounted

NETWORK PR

OCESSING ENGINE

POWER

CONSOLE

AUX

Screws

Step 1

Step 2

Align the cable-management brackets with the rack-mount brackets as shown in Figure 7-20.

Insert and tighten two screws for each bracket. The screws come with the cable-management brackets.

Figure 7-21

Attaching Console and Auxiliary Port Cables

NETW

ORK PR

OCESSING ENGINE

CPU

RESET

S L O

C T I V E

COMP

CT FLASH

WER

CONSOLE

Console port

Cable to console terminal or DTE

Cable to modem or DCE

Auxiliary port

RJ-45 connectors

Step 3

Step 4

Insert the console and auxiliary RJ-45 cables into the interface ports on the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2.

Place the cables through the cable-management brackets.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-33

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-34

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Installing the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2

Figure 7-23

Installing the Chassis in a Telco-Type Rack with an Installed Cable-Management

Bracket

Rack-mount bracket

Cable-management bracket

Reconnecting Input Power and Powering Up the Router

The following procedures explain how to reconnect input power to a Cisco 7200 VXR router, Cisco

UBR7225VXR, or Cisco uBR7246VXR router, power up the router, and verify a successful system boot.

Warning

Read the installation instructions before you connect the system to its power source. Statement 10

Reconnecting AC-Input Power to the Cisco 7200 VXR Router

To reconnect AC-input power to a Cisco 7200 VXR router, complete the following steps:

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

At the rear of the router, check that the power switch on the power supply is in the off (O) position.

Slide the cable-retention clip up away from the AC receptacle, and plug in the power cable.

Secure the cable in the power supply AC receptacle by sliding the cable-retention clip down until it snaps

around the connector. The cable-retention clip provides strain relief for the AC power cable.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-35

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Installing the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2

Figure 7-24

Connecting AC-Input Power to a Cisco 7200 VXR Router

Power switch

Cable-retention clip

AC power cable

Hole for nylon cable tie

POWER OK LED

Step 4

Plug the AC power supply cable into the AC power source.

Note

For Cisco 7200 VXR routers, each AC-input power supply operating at 120 VAC requires a

minimum of 5A service.

We recommend powering the Cisco 7200 VXR routers from a 120 VAC, 15A receptacle U.S.

(240 VAC, 10A international) at the power source.

Step 5

Repeat Step 1 through Step 4 if a second power supply is installed.

This completes the steps for reconnecting AC-input power to a Cisco 7200 VXR router. Proceed to the

“Powering Up the Router” section on page 7-45.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-36

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Installing the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2

Reconnecting AC-Input Power to the Cisco uBR7246VXR Router

Figure 7-25

Connecting AC-Input Power to a Cisco uBR7246VXR Router

Cable-retention clip

Power receptacle

Captive installation screw

AC power cable

Power switch

Handle

To reconnect AC-input power to a Cisco uBR7246VXR router, complete the following steps:

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

At the rear of the router, check that the power switch on the power supply is in the off (O) position.

Slide the cable-retention clip to the left away from the AC receptacle, and plug in the power cable.

Secure the cable in the power supply AC receptacle by sliding the cable-retention clip to the right until

it snaps around the connector. The cable-retention clip provides strain relief for the AC power cable.

Step 4

Plug the AC power supply cable into the AC power source.

Note

For the Cisco uBR7200 series routers, each AC-input power supply operating at 120 VAC

requires a minimum of 7A service.

We recommend powering the Cisco uBR7200 series routers from a 120 VAC, 15A receptacle

U.S. (240 VAC, 10A international) at the power source.

Step 5

Repeat Step 1 through Step 4 if a second power supply is installed.

This completes the steps for reconnecting AC-input power to a Cisco uBR7246VXR router. Proceed to

the “Powering Up the Router” section on page 7-45.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-37

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Installing the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2

Reconnecting AC-Input Power to the Cisco uBR7225VXR Router

To connect AC-input power to the Cisco uBR7225VXR router, complete the following steps:

At the rear of the router, ensure that the power switch on the power supply is in the off position.

Figure 7-26 Connecting AC-Input Power to a Cisco UBR7225VXR Router

Step 1

Step 2

Note

Plug the power cable into the AC connector of the power supply.

For additional AC power cable strain relief, secure the cable to the power supply handle by inserting a

nylon cable tie through the hole in the handle and around the cable.

Step 3

Step 4

Step 5

Plug the AC power supply cable into the AC power source.

Repeat Step 1 through Step 3 for the second power supply, if required.

Turn on the power switch on the router.

This completes the steps for reconnecting AC-Input power to a Cisco UBR7225VXR router. Proceed to

the “Powering Up the Router” section on page 7-45

Reconnecting DC-Input Power to the Cisco 7200 VXR Router

To reconnect DC-input power to a Cisco 7200 VXR router, complete the following steps.

Note

The color coding of the DC-input power supply leads depends on the color coding of the DC power

source at your site. Typically, green or green and yellow are used for ground. Make certain that the lead

color coding you choose for the DC-input power supply matches the lead color coding used at the DC

power source.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-38

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Installing the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2

Warning

Before completing any of the following steps, and to prevent short-circuit or shock hazards, ensure

that power is removed from the DC circuit. To ensure that all power is OFF, locate the circuit breaker

on the panel board that services the DC circuit, switch the circuit breaker to the OFF position, and

tape the switch handle of the circuit breaker in the OFF position. Statement 322

When installing the unit, the ground connection must always be made first and disconnected last.

Statement 42

Step 1

Step 2

At the rear of the router, check that the power switch on the power supply is in the off (O) position.

Ensure that no current is running through the –V and +V leads. To ensure that all power is off, locate the

circuit breaker on the panel board that services the DC circuit, switch the circuit breaker to the off

position, and tape the switch handle of the circuit breaker in the off position.

Figure 7-27

Connecting DC-Input Power to a Cisco 7200 VXR Router

Power switch

Cable tie

Ground lead service loop

DC power leads

Step 3

If necessary, use a wire stripper to strip approximately 0.55 inch (14 mm) from the –V, +V, and ground

leads. (See Figure 7-28.)

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-39

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Installing the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2

Figure 7-28

Stripping the DC-Input Lines

0.55 in. (14 mm)

Step 4

For the Cisco 7200 VXR routers, insert the stripped end of the ground lead all the way into the ground

lead receptacle on the DC-input power supply and tighten the receptacle screw using a 3/16-inch

flat-blade screwdriver.

Step 5

Insert the stripped end of the +V lead all the way into the +V lead receptacle and tighten the receptacle

screw using the same 3/16-inch flat-blade screwdriver. Repeat this step for the –V lead.

Note

Make sure that the entire stripped end of each lead is inserted all the way into its receptacle. If any

exposed wire at the stripped end of a lead is visible after inserting the lead into its receptacle, remove

the lead from the receptacle, use the wire stripper to cut the stripped end of the lead, and repeat through

Step 5.

Step 6

After tightening the receptacle screws for the ground, +V, and –V DC-input leads, secure the leads to the

power supply faceplate.

Use the cable tie you saved earlier in this procedure to secure the three leads.

Note

When securing the ground, +V, and –V DC-input leads to the power supply faceplate, leave a

small service loop in the ground lead to ensure that it is the last lead to disconnect from the power

supply if a great deal of strain is placed on all three leads. (See Figure 7-27.)

Step 7

Restore current to the –V and +V leads.

Note

For the Cisco 7200 VXR routers:

– Each DC-input power supply operating at 24 VDC requires a minimum of 19A service.

– Each DC-input power supply operating at 48 VDC requires a minimum of 13A service.

– Each DC-input power supply operating at 60 VDC requires a minimum of 8A service.

This product relies on the building’s installation for short-circuit (overcurrent) protection.

Ensure that a listed and certified fuse or circuit breaker, 35A minimum 60 VDC, is used on all

current-carrying conductors. Site wiring and circuit breakers need to be sized to accommodate

the maximum values for safety reasons.

Step 8

Repeat Step 1 through Step 7 if a second power supply is installed.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-40

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Installing the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2

This completes the steps for reconnecting DC-input power to a Cisco 7200 VXR router. Proceed to the

“Powering Up the Router” section on page 7-45.

Reconnecting DC-Input Power to a Cisco uBR7246VXR Router

To reconnect DC-input power to a Cisco uBR7246VXR router, complete the following steps.

Note

The color coding of the DC-input power supply leads depends on the color coding of the DC power

source at your site. Typically, green or green and yellow are used for ground. Make certain that the lead

color coding you choose for the DC-input power supply matches the lead color coding used at the DC

power source.

Warning

Before completing any of the following procedures, and to prevent short-circuit or shock hazards,

ensure that power is removed from the DC circuit. To ensure that all power is OFF, locate the circuit

breaker on the panel board that services the DC circuit, switch the circuit breaker to the OFF position,

and tape the switch handle of the circuit breaker in the OFF position. Statement 322

When installing the unit, the ground connection must always be made first and disconnected last.

Statement 42

Step 1

Step 2

At the rear of the router, check that the power switch on the power supply is in the off (O) position.

Ensure that no current is running through the –V and +V leads. To ensure that all power is off, locate the

circuit breaker on the panel board that services the DC circuit, switch the circuit breaker to the off

position, and tape the switch handle of the circuit breaker in the off position.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-41

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Installing the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2

Figure 7-29

Connecting DC-Input Power to a Cisco uBR7246VXR Router

Power switch

–V lead

Power receptacle

M4 studs

+V lead

Handle

Captive installation screw

M5 grounding receptacles

M5 grounding lug

Step 3

Note

SIf necessary, use a wire stripper to strip approximately 0.55 inch (14 mm) from the –V, +V, and ground

leads.

The ground lead for the Cisco uBR7200 series DC-input power supply consists of a two-hole grounding

lug that connects to an M5 grounding receptacle; you do not need to strip this ground lead.

Figure 7-30

Stripping the DC-Input Lines

0.55 in. (14 mm)

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-42

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Installing the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2

Step 4

Step 5

Connect the two-hole grounding lug on the grounding lead to the M5 grounding receptacles with the M5

nuts. Tighten the nuts using an 8-mm wrench or nut driver (or adjustable wrench). (See Figure 7-31.)

Insert the stripped end of the +V lead all the way into the +V lead receptacle and tighten the receptacle

screw using the 3/16-inch flat-blade screwdriver. Repeat this step for the –V lead.

Note

Make sure that the entire stripped end of each lead is inserted all the way into its receptacle. If any

exposed wire at the stripped end of a lead is visible after inserting the lead into its receptacle, remove

the lead from the receptacle, use the wire stripper to cut the stripped end of the lead, and repeat through

Step 5.

Step 6

Step 7

After tightening the receptacle screw or nuts for the ground, +V, and –V DC-input leads, secure the leads

to the power supply faceplate.

Run the +V and –V leads between the two strain-relief studs on the power supply faceplate.

Note

A service loop is not required in the lead attached to the grounding lug because this lead is

separate from the +V and –V leads and is secured by two M5 nuts to the M5 receptacles.

Step 8

Replace the strain-relief cover over the +V and –V leads and secure the cover to the strain-relief studs

with the two M4 nuts using the 7-mm wrench or nut driver (or adjustable wrench).

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-43

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Installing the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2

Figure 7-31

Replacing the Strain-Relief Cover on a Cisco uBR7246VXR Series DC-Input Power

Supply

Power switch

–V lead

Power receptacle

+V lead

Captive installation screw

M5 grounding receptacles

M5 grounding lug

Strain-relief cover

M4 nuts

Step 9

Restore current to the –V and +V leads.

Note

For the Cisco uBR7200 series routers, each DC-input power supply rating is 14A, 700 volt

ampere (VA).

This product relies on the building’s installation for short-circuit (overcurrent) protection.

Ensure that a listed and certified fuse or circuit breaker, 35A minimum 60 VDC, is used on all

current-carrying conductors. Site wiring and circuit breakers need to be sized to accommodate

the maximum values for safety reasons.

Step 10 Repeat Step 1 through Step 9 if a second power supply is installed.

This completes the steps for reconnecting DC-input power to a Cisco uBR7246VXR router. Proceed to

the following section, “Powering Up the Router.”

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-44

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Installing the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2

Powering Up the Router

To power up a Cisco 7200 VXR router, Cisco uBR7246VXR router, or Cisco uBR7225VXR router that

has an installed power supply, complete the following steps:

Step 1

Check for the following:

–

Each port adapter is inserted in its slot, and its respective port adapter lever is in the locked

position.

The network processing engine and the I/O controller or I/O controller blank panel are inserted

in their respective slots, and the captive installation screws are tightened.

All network interface cables are connected to the port adapters or I/O controller or NPE-G1 or

NPE-G2 interfaces.

Each cable interface line card is inserted in its slot, and its respective captive installation screws

are tightened (Cisco uBR7246VXR router only).

(Optional) A CompactFlash Disk is installed in the CompactFlash Disk slot in the NPE-G1 or

NPE-G2. If you also have an I/O controller installed, you can optionally install a PC Card or

Flash Disk in one of the I/O controller’s PC Card slots.

Note

A Flash Disk can be installed in either slot 0 or slot 1 of the I/O controller. A

CompactFlash Disk can be installed only in the CompactFlash Disk slot in the NPE-G1

or NPE-G2.

–

(Optional) A USB Flash memory module or USB eToken Pro key is inserted into a USB port on

the NPE-G2.

Each AC-input power cable is connected and secured with the cable-retention clip, except for

uBR7224VXR routers(AC-input power supplies only).

For a Cisco 7200 VXR router, each DC lead is connected and secured to the power supply

faceplate with a cable tie.

For a Cisco uBR7246VXR router, each DC lead is connected with M4 nuts for the grounding

receptacle and the strain-relief cover over the +V and –V leads (DC-input power supplies only).

–

Each DC lead is connected and secured to the power source (DC-input power supplies only).

Ensure that the tape (that you applied earlier) is removed from the circuit breaker switch handle,

and power is restored by moving the circuit breaker handle to the on (|) position (DC-input

power supplies only).

–

The console terminal is turned on.

Caution

Step 2

When the power switch on a Cisco uBR7200 series power supply is turned to the off (O) position, the

power supply enters a reset cycle for 90 seconds. Wait at least 90 seconds before turning the power

switch back to the on (|) position. If you do not wait the full 90 seconds, the power supply does not

restart.

At the rear of the router, place the power switch on the power supply in the on (|) position. Repeat this

step if a second power supply is installed in the router. The green OK LED on the power supply turns on.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-45

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Enabling the Second Processor on the NPE-G1

Note

When powering on the router, wait a minimum of 30 seconds before powering it off again.

Listen for the fans; you should immediately hear them operating.

Step 3

Step 4

During the boot process, observe the system LEDs. The LEDs on most of the port adapters go on and off

in an irregular sequence. Some may go on, go off, and go on again for a short time. On the NPE-G1 or

NPE-G2 and the I/O controller, the POWER OK LED goes on immediately.

Step 5

Observe the initialization process. When the system boot is complete (a few seconds), the NPE-G1 or

NPE-G2 begins to initialize the port adapters and the I/O controller. During this initialization, the LEDs

on each port adapter behave differently (most flash on and off). The enabled LED on each port adapter

and Cisco uBR7200 series cable interface line card goes on when initialization is completed, and the

console screen displays a script and system banner similar to the following:

Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software

IOS (tm) 7200 Software (C7200-J-M), 11.3(2)T

Compiled Sun 22-Feb-98 06:00 by Biff

This completes the procedures for connecting input power and powering up the router. This also

completes the procedure for installing the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 in a Cisco 7200 VXR router,

Cisco uBR7246VXR router, or Cisco uBR7225VXR.

Enabling the Second Processor on the NPE-G1

The Cisco 7200VXR NPE-G1 includes a dual-CPU-core BCM1250 processor. All Cisco IOS images for

the Cisco 7200VXR NPE-G1 use CPU-core 0. CPU-core 1 allows acceleration of specific feature sets via

separately purchased special software. As of Cisco IOS Release 12.3(14)YM, multi-processor forwarding

(MPF) accelerates the following broadband features: L2TP Access Concentrator (LAC), L2TP Network

Server (LNS), and PPP Terminated Aggregation (PTA). Port adapters are not supported in the

multi-processor forwarding (MPF) path on processor 1.

Only the following port adapters are supported in the punt path (Processor 0 processing Cisco IOS) on

Cisco IOS Release 12.3(14)YM and later releases of Cisco IOS Release 12.3YM:

•

PA-A3-OC3 (SMI/SML/MM)

PA-A3-T3

PA-A3-E3

PA-A6-OC3 (SMI/SML/MM)

PA-A6-T3

PA-A6-E3

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-46

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Enabling the Second Processor on the NPE-G1

•

Upgrade the ROMmon. (The minimum ROMmon version is 12.3-4r.T3.)

Install the enabling software.

Instructions for upgrading ROMmon are in the “Using the upgrade rom-monitor file Command” section

on page 7-64.

The minimum software release for the Broadband L2TP Access Concentrator (LAC), L2TP Network

Server (LNS), and PPP Terminated Aggregation (PTA) is Cisco IOS Release 12.3(14)YM.

Also see the MPF for Broadband LAC, LNS, and PTA document for minimum memory requirements and

configuration information.

Note

Before enabling the second processor, you must have IP routing turned on.

Processor 1 is enabled by default after you install the enabling software. To have all packets forwarded

by processor 0, use the no ip mpf command. To enable processor 1, use the ip mpf command.

Save the running configuration to NVRAM. See the “Copying the Saved Configuration to NVRAM”

section on page 7-52. If you do not save the configuration settings that you created in the router using

configuration mode and the setup facility, your configuration will be lost the next time you reload the

router.

Error Messages

The following error messages are displayed if a feature is configured that is not supported in the MPF

path:

Router# %MPF-4-IGNOREDFEATURES: Interface Gi0/3: Input "PBR" configurations are not MPF

supported and are IGNORED. %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from console by console

Router# (config-if)# %MPF-4-IGNOREDFEATURES: Interface Gi0/3: Input "PBR" configurations

are not MPF supported and are IGNORED.

%MPF-4-IGNOREDFEATURES: Interface Gi0/3: Output "NetFlow" configurations

are not MPF supported and are IGNORED.

Using show Commands Associated with the mpf Command

There are a variety of show commands associated with the mpf command. They are listed below along

with sample output. Use these commands to verify the mpf installation.

•

Using the show interface stats Command, page 7-48

Using the show ip interface Command, page 7-48

Using the show mpf cpu Command, page 7-49

Using the show mpf cpu history Command, page 7-49

Using the show mpf interface Command, page 7-50

Using the show mpf ip exact-route Command, page 7-51

Using the show mpf punt Command, page 7-51

Using the show version Command, page 7-51

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-47

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Enabling the Second Processor on the NPE-G1

Using the show interface stats Command

Use the show interface stats command for information about the interface.

Router# show interface stats

GigabitEthernet0/1

Switching path

Processor

Pkts In

33090

Chars In

6424353

116

Pkts Out Chars Out

86353

8645650

Route cache

Multi-Processor Fwding

Total

1004

34096

158632

6583101

5004

91357

790632

9436282

Using the show ip interface Command

Use the show ip interface command to get information about the specific interface port.

Router# show ip interface g0/3

GigabitEthernet0/3 is up, line protocol is up

Internet address is 155.1.1.1/16

Broadcast address is 255.255.255.255

Address determined by setup command

MTU is 1500 bytes

Helper address is not set

Directed broadcast forwarding is disabled

Outgoing access list is not set

Inbound access list is not set

Proxy ARP is enabled

Local Proxy ARP is disabled

Security level is default

Split horizon is enabled

ICMP redirects are always sent

ICMP unreachables are always sent

ICMP mask replies are never sent

IP fast switching is enabled

IP fast switching on the same interface is disabled

IP Flow switching is disabled

IP CEF switching is enabled

IP Feature Fast switching turbo vector

IP VPN Flow CEF switching turbo vector

IP multicast fast switching is enabled

IP multicast distributed fast switching is disabled

IP route-cache flags are Fast, CEF

Router Discovery is disabled

IP output packet accounting is disabled

IP access violation accounting is disabled

TCP/IP header compression is disabled

RTP/IP header compression is disabled

Policy routing is enabled, using route map PBR

Network address translation is disabled

BGP Policy Mapping is disabled

IP Multi-Processor Forwarding is enabled

IP Input features, "PBR",

are not supported by MPF and are IGNORED

IP Output features, "NetFlow",

are not supported by MPF and are IGNORED

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-48

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Enabling the Second Processor on the NPE-G1

Using the show mpf cpu Command

Use the show mpf cpu command to display the average second CPU utilization in the last five seconds, one

minute, and five minutes.

hostname: show mpf cpu

CPU utilization for five seconds: 33%; one minute: 25%; five minutes: 30%

Using the show mpf cpu history Command

Use the show mpf cpu history command to graph output of the second CPU utilization for the last 60

seconds, 60 minutes, and 72 hours.

Router# show mpf cpu history

slns 12:12:40 AM Saturday Nov 18 2000 UTC

3333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333

100

30 ***************************

20 ***************************

10 ***************************

0....5....1....1....2....2....3....3....4....4....5....5....

CPU% per second (last 60 seconds)

3333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333

100

30 #################

20 #################

10 #################

0....5....1....1....2....2....3....3....4....4....5....5....

CPU% per minute (last 60 minutes)

* = maximum CPU% # = average CPU%

100 *

90 *

80 *

70 **

60 **

50 **

40 ##

30 ##

20 ##

10 ##

0....5....1....1....2....2....3....3....4....4....5....5....6....6....7.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-49

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Enabling the Second Processor on the NPE-G1

CPU% per hour (last 72 hours)

* = maximum CPU% # = average CPU%

Using the show mpf interface Command

Using the show mpf interface command without arguments shows the interface information for all

Gigabit Ethernet interfaces and subinterfaces. This command is supported only for physical interfaces.

There is no support for the virtual access interface.

Router# show mpf interface

Name

Gi0/1

Index State Counter

Count

1004

158632

5004

790632

32961

85972

RX packets

RX bytes

TX packets

TX bytes

RX punts

TX punts

Gi0/1

Gi0/1.100 100

RX packets

RX bytes

TX packets

TX bytes

1004

158632

5004

790632

RX punts

Gi0/1.101 101

Gi0/1.102 102

Gi0/1.105 105

Gi0/1.106 106

Gi0/1.107 107

Gi0/1.200 200

Gi0/1.201 201

Gi0/1.202 202

Gi0/1.206 206

Gi0/1.2002 602

Gi0/1.2004 604

RX punts

26114

Using the show mpf interface GigabitEthernet 0/1 Command

The following example displays the interface information for GigabitEthernet 1/0, subinterface number

100. However, all Gigabit Ethernet interface and subinterface information is displayed because MPF

does not recognize the subinterface number, unless it is a VLAN number.

Router# show mpf interface GigabitEthernet 0/1.100

Name

Gi0/1

Index

State

Counter

Count

1004

158632

5004

790632

32996

86062

RX packets

RX bytes

TX packets

TX bytes

RX punts

TX punts

Gi0/1

Gi0/1.100

100

RX packets

RX bytes

TX packets

TX bytes

1004

158632

5004

790632

RX punts

Gi0/1.101

Gi0/1.102

Gi0/1.105

Gi0/1.106

Gi0/1.107

Gi0/1.200

101

102

105

106

107

200

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-50

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Enabling the Second Processor on the NPE-G1

Gi0/1.201

Gi0/1.202

Gi0/1.206

Gi0/1.2002

Gi0/1.2004

201

202

206

602

604

RX punts

26142

Using the show mpf interface GigabitEthernet 0/1 100 Command

The following example displays the interface information for VLAN number 100 on the GigabitEthernet

0/1 interface, including up state, receiving packet count, receiving bytes count, transmitting packet

count, transmitting bytes count, and receiving punts count.

Router# show mpf interface GigabitEthernet 0/1 100

Name

Gi0/1.100 100

Index

State

Counter

RX total

RX punt

TX total

Packets

963

Bytes

151050

475

956

150449

IP Multi-Processor Forwarding is enabled

Using the show mpf ip exact-route Command

Use the show mpf ip exact-route command to show which routing decision is made for a given IP

address pair.

hostname: show mpf ip exact-route [vrf vrf_name] src-ip-addr dst-ip-addr

1.1.1.1 -> 192.168.255.255 :Gi2/0/0 (next hop 10.1.255.10)

Using the show mpf punt Command

Use the show mpf punt command to display the per-box punt reason and punt packet counts.

Router# show mpf punt

Type

Message

Count

l2tp

unknown session errors

L2TP control

ipv4/verify

ethernet

ppp

adjacency punt

unknown ethernet type

punts due to unknown protocol

ARP request

542

333

arp

Using the show version Command

Following is output from the show version command with the second processor enabled. Note that the

show version output provides “SB-1 CPU” when processor 1 is enabled.

Router# show version

Cisco IOS Software, 7200 Software (C7200-I12S-M), Version 12.3(BSNOP4_NIGHTLY.050202)

UBUILDIT Image, CISCO DEVELOPMENT TEST VERSION

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-51

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Copying the Saved Configuration to NVRAM

Compiled Wed 02-Feb-05 04:57 by

ROM: System Bootstrap, Version 12.3(4r)T3, RELEASE SOFTWARE (fc1)

BOOTLDR: Cisco IOS Software, 7200 Software (C7200-KBOOT-M),

12.3(20040712:050512) [REL-v123_7_xi_throttle.ios-weekly 115]

Lac1 uptime is 16 hours, 22 minutes

System returned to ROM by reload at 18:12:49 UTC Mon Feb 7 2005

System image file is

"tftp://223.255.254.254/auto/tftpboot-users/biff/c7200-i12s-mz.2005-02-02.BSNOP4_NIGH"

Last reload reason: Reload command

Cisco 7206VXR (NPE-G1) processor (revision 0xFF) with 983040K/65536K bytes of memory.

Processor board ID 31650243

SB-1 CPU at 700MHz, Implementation 1025, Rev 0.2, 512KB L2 Cache

6 slot VXR midplane, Version 2.7

Last reset from power-on

CPU 1 Multi-Processor Forwarding, Tue Feb 1 00:48:42 PST 2005 [rtang 100]

PCI bus mb1 (Slots 1, 3 and 5) has a capacity of 600 bandwidth points.

Current configuration on bus mb1 has a total of 400 bandwidth points.

This configuration is within the PCI bus capacity and is supported.

PCI bus mb2 (Slots 2, 4 and 6) has a capacity of 600 bandwidth points.

Current configuration on bus mb2 has a total of 700 bandwidth points.

The set of PA-2FE, PA-POS-2OC3, and I/O-2FE qualify for "half

bandwidth points" consideration, when full bandwidth point counting

results in oversubscription, under the condition that only one of the

two ports is used. With this adjustment, current configuration on bus

mb2 has a total of 700 bandwidth points.

This configuration has oversubscripted the PCI bus and is not a

supported configuration.

Please refer to the following document "Cisco 7200 Series Port

Adaptor Hardware Configuration Guidelines" on CCO <www.cisco.com>,

for c7200 bandwidth points oversubscription/usage guidelines.

WARNING: PCI bus mb2 Exceeds 600 bandwidth points

1 Ethernet interface

2 FastEthernet interfaces

5 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces

1 ATM interface

509K bytes of NVRAM.

62976K bytes of ATA PCMCIA card at slot 2 (Sector size 512 bytes).

16384K bytes of Flash internal SIMM (Sector size 256K).

Configuration register is 0x2

Copying the Saved Configuration to NVRAM

After installing and cabling the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 and powering on the router, copy the configuration

file to the NVRAM on the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2, using one of the following procedures:

•

If you have kept the previous I/O controller installed in the router, use the procedure given in the

“Copying the Saved Configuration File from a Flash Disk or PC Card” section on page

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-52

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Copying the Saved Configuration to NVRAM

Copying the Saved Configuration File from a Flash Disk or PC Card

To copy the saved configuration file from the Flash Disk or PC Card, follow these steps:

Step 1

Make sure you are at the privileged level of the EXEC command interpreter (check the system prompt

for a pound sign [#]). If the system prompt does not have a pound sign (#), enter enable, and then your

password.

Step 2

Step 3

Insert the Flash Disk or PC Card containing the saved configuration file into the first PC Card slot in

the I/O controller.

Enter the copy disk0: filename running or copy slot0: filename running command.

Router# copy disk0:filename running

Router# copy slot0:filename running

Step 4

Enter the write command:

Router# write

You have finished copying and writing the saved configuration file to NVRAM.

Copying the Saved Configuration File from the CompactFlash Disk

If you have been able to copy the configuration file to the CompactFlash Disk, use the following steps

to copy the configuration to the NVRAM on the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2:

Step 1

Make sure you are at the privileged level of the EXEC command interpreter (check the system prompt

for a pound sign [#]). If the system prompt does not have a pound sign (#), enter enable, and then your

password.

Step 2

Step 3

Insert the CompactFlash Disk containing the saved configuration file into the CompactFlash Disk slot

on the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2.

Enter the copy disk2: filename command.

Router# copy disk2:filename running

Step 4

Enter the write command:

Router#: write

You have finished copying and writing the saved configuration file to NVRAM.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-53

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Copying the Saved Configuration to NVRAM

Downloading the Saved Configuration from the TFTP Server

After you install the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 in the router and verify a successful router boot, you must

retrieve the router configuration from the TFTP server and copy it to NVRAM. Use the copy tftp

running-config command to copy the saved configuration from the TFTP file server. The system

prompts you for a hostname and address, the name of the configuration file stored on the host, and

confirmation to reboot using the remote file.

After the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 is installed, save the router configuration file to NVRAM (the default is

the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 NVRAM) using the copy system:running-config nvram:startup-config

command as follows:

Router# copy system:running-config nvram:startup-config

You will want to configure the NPE-G1or NPE-G2 interfaces after retrieving the router configuration

and copying it to NVRAM.

Before retrieving the router configuration file from the TFTP server, check the following:

•

A console terminal is connected to the console port on the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2, or a Telnet session

is established to the router.

•

The router is connected to a network supporting a file server (remote host).

The remote host supports the TFTP application.

You have the name or address of the remote host.

Before configuring the new interfaces on the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2, be prepared with the following

information:

•

Protocols and encapsulations you plan to use on the new interface

Protocol-specific information, such as IP addresses if you will configure the interface for IP routing

For complete descriptions of interface commands and the configuration options available for Cisco 7200

VXR-related interfaces, refer to the documentation resources listed in the “Related Documentation”

section on page iii.

To retrieve the saved router configuration from the remote host, complete the following steps:

Step 1

Make sure you are at the privileged level of the EXEC command interpreter (check the system prompt

for a pound sign [#]). If the system prompt does not have a pound sign (#), enter enable, and then your

password.

Note

Until you retrieve the saved configuration, the router runs from the default configuration in

NVRAM. Therefore, any passwords that were previously configured on the system are not valid

until you retrieve the configuration.

Step 2

Step 3

Use the ping command to check the connection between the router and the remote host (the remote file

server to which you copied the configuration file).

At the system prompt, enter the copy tftp running-config command and press Return to enter

configuration mode. Specify that you will configure the system from a network device (instead of from

the console terminal, which is the default).

Router# copy tftp running-config

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-54

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Copying the Saved Configuration to NVRAM

Step 4

The system prompts you to select a host or network configuration file. The default is host; press Return

to accept the default.

Host or network configuration file [host]?

Step 5

Step 6

The system prompts you for the IP address of the host. Enter the IP address or name of the remote host.

IP address of remote host [255.255.255.255]? 10.1.1.1

The system prompts you for the name of the configuration file. When the system copies the file to the

server, the default is to use the name of the router with the suffix -confg (router-confg in the following

example). If you specified a different filename when you copied the configuration, enter that filename;

otherwise, press Return to accept the default.

Name of configuration file [router-confg]?

Step 7

Before the system reboots with the new configuration, it displays the instructions you entered for

confirmation. If the instructions are not correct, enter n (no), and then press Return to cancel the

process. To accept the instructions, press Return, or y and then Return.

Configure using router-confg from 10.1.1.1? [confirm]

Booting router-confg from 10.1.1.1: ! ! [OK - 874/16000 bytes]

While the router retrieves and boots from the configuration on the remote host, the console display

indicates whether or not the operation was successful. A series of exclamation points (!!!!) and [OK] (as

shown in the preceding example) indicates that the operation was successful. A series of periods (. . .)

and [timed out] or [failed] indicates a failure (which would probably be due to a network fault or an

incorrect server name, address, or filename). The following is an example of a failed attempt to boot from

a remote server:

Booting Router-confg ..... [timed out]

•

If the display indicates that the process was successful, proceed to the next step.

If the display indicates that the process failed, verify the name or address of the remote server and

the filename, and repeat the preceding steps. If you are unable to retrieve the configuration, contact

your network administrator or see the “Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service

Request” section on page iv for instructions on contacting Cisco technical assistance.

Step 8

Step 9

Enter the show running-config command to display the currently running configuration on the

terminal. Review the display and ensure that the configuration information is complete and correct. If it

is not, verify the filename and repeat the preceding steps to retrieve the correct file, or use the

configure command to add or modify the existing configuration. (Refer to the appropriate software

documentation for descriptions of the configuration options available for the system and individual

interfaces and specific configuration instructions.)

When you have verified that the currently running configuration is correct, enter the

copy running-config startup-config command to save the retrieved configuration in NVRAM.

Otherwise, the new configuration will be lost when you restart the system.

This completes the procedure for downloading the saved router configuration from the remote host.

Proceed to the “Configuring the Native Gigabit Ethernet Interfaces” section on page 7-56.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-55

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Auxiliary and Console Port Information

If the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 and an I/O controller are both installed in the same system, the console and

auxiliary ports on the I/O controller are used and the console and auxiliary ports on the NPE-G1 or

NPE-G2 are disabled by Cisco IOS.

Both the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 and the I/O controller console ports are available from the ROM monitor

(ROMmon); however, once the system has completed loading the Cisco IOS image, the console port on

the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 is disabled if an I/O controller is also installed in the router.

If the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 is used without an I/O controller, the console and auxiliary ports on the

NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 are available both during and after loading the Cisco IOS image.

Configuring an Auxiliary Port to Receive Console Port Messages

If you choose to have console port messages routed to the auxiliary port, use the Cisco IOS command

terminal monitor on the auxiliary port on which you desire to receive console messages.

Router# terminal monitor

Configuring the Native Gigabit Ethernet Interfaces

The NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 report both the RJ-45 and GBIC or SFP GE interface ports as GigabitEthernet

0/1, GigabitEthernet 0/2, and GigabitEthernet 0/3. Each interface has two ports with two different media

types, GBIC or SFP, or RJ-45 (default). You can use only one port for each interface, and before

configuring either port type, you must first use the media-type interface command to select the media

type, GBIC (gbic) for NPE-G1 or SFP (sfp) for NPE-G2, or RJ-45 (rj45) port.

Note

The Gigabit Ethernet interfaces on the NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 do not support the Inter-Switch Link (ISL)

VLAN encapsulation protocol. We recommend that customers use the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN

encapsulation protocol as an alternative. Where an application requires the use of ISL, this can be

provided by the Fast Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet port adapters or I/O controllers.

Note

The RJ-45 port is the default media.

Changing the Media Type of the Native Gigabit Ethernet GBIC, SFP,

or RJ-45 Ports

To be able to use a particular media port, use Cisco IOS to select the media type. This is done by using

the media-type interface command:

media-type { gbic | sfp | rj45 }

Example:

interface GigabitEthernet 0/1

media-type rj45

end

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-56

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Configuring the Native Gigabit Ethernet Interfaces

Configuring the Interface Transmission and Speed Modes

Step 1

After changing the media type, configure the speed and transmission modes to appropriately match the

new interface characteristics. Changing the speed and duplex of an NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 Gigabit Ethernet

interface is done using the speed and duplex interface commands.

Note

These commands are only applicable when using the RJ-45 media.

speed { 10 | 100 | 1000 | auto }

duplex { full | half | auto }

The following speed/duplex settings are supported:

Media Type

Speed

Duplex

-------------------------------------------------------

RJ45

GBIC(1)

10, 100, 1000, auto

1000, auto(2)

full, half, auto

-------------------------------------------------------

a. If you are using the no negotiation auto command, the speed and duplex should be set to a value

other than auto for correct operation.

b. The only available speed in the no autonegotiation mode is 1000 Mbps; there is no difference

whether 1000 or auto is selected.

When using the GBIC media, there is also the additional negotiation auto command that is used to

enable the IEEE 802.1z Gigabit Ethernet (1000 Mbps) autonegotiation protocol.

Step 2

Note

To turn the autonegotiation feature off (it is on by default), issue the interface command no negotiation

auto. This is useful for connecting to other Gigabit Ethernet equipment that does not support 802.1z

autonegotiation.

The autonegotiation feature is not supported when using the rj-45 media type and will be ignored if

implementation is attempted.

If you change from the GBIC or SFP to the rj-45 media type, you must set speed and duplex after you

have executed the media-type command to ensure the interface will operate in the correct mode.

The media-type GBIC or media-type SFP mode will always default to 1000 Mbps. Both full-duplex

and half-duplex operations are supported in this mode.

Sample Configuration for the Gigabit Ethernet Interfaces

The following shows a typical configuration for the three Gigabit Ethernet interfaces on the NPE-G1.

The same configuration would be typical for the NPE-G2 also, although the second interface would be

configured for the SFP media type. In this example, the first interface is configured for the GBIC media

type, the second interface is configured for the RJ-45 media type, and the third interface is not used.

interface GigabitEthernet0/1

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-57

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Configuring the Native Gigabit Ethernet Interfaces

ip address 10.198.75.35 255.255.255.240

load-interval 30

no keepalive

duplex full

speed 1000

media-type gbic

no negotiation auto

no cdp enable

no shutdown

interface GigabitEthernet0/2

ip address 10.179.16.2 255.255.255.240

duplex auto

speed auto

media-type rj45

no cdp enable

no shutdown

interface GigabitEthernet0/3

no ip address

shutdown

duplex auto

speed auto

media-type rj45

no negotiation auto

no cdp enable

Note

At the very minimum, an interface must be configured with the ip address, media-type, and speed

commands before it can be enabled using the no shutdown command. Other interface commands might

be needed, depending on the nature of the connected network.

Debugging

Cisco IOS provides two commands to provide information on your interfaces: show interface

GigabitEthernet 0/X (where X is 1, 2, or 3) and show controllers GigabitEthernet 0/0.

The output of the show interface command is useful for determining the current operating mode of the

interface (speed/duplex/media-type) and the current interface statistics.

The output of the show controllers command displays more information specific to the I/O controller

interface. For example, it shows the detected link status, speed, and duplex, and also determines the

current status of autonegotiation and the link partners’ abilities (if it is an autonegotiation-capable

interface).

The show controllers command also displays the current operating state of the driver and the Ethernet

controller hardware. The show controllers command is a very powerful debugging aid, especially for

Cisco engineers should you need help in debugging a problem. If you have any problems with your

Gigabit Ethernet interfaces, you will need to provide the show controllers command output to Cisco for

analysis.

Resetting the Interface

Should you have a problem with your interface and wish to try and reset it, use the command:

clear interface GigabitEthernet 0/X (where X is 1, 2, or 3)

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-58

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Using show Commands to Check the Installation

Clearing Counters

Interface counters may be cleared (reset) by using the command:

clear counters GigabitEthernet 0/X (where X is 1, 2, or 3)

This will not reset the interface.

Using show Commands to Check the Installation

Use show commands to identify the hardware installed in your router, to verify the operation status, to

view interface configuration settings, and to troubleshoot your router configuration. The interfaces on

the NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 are identified by their chassis slot number and interface port number

(slot/port). The interfaces on your I/O controller are also identified by chassis slot number and interface

port number (slot/port). The chassis slot number for the I/O controller is always slot 0. Table 7-1 lists

the NPE-G1, NPE-G2, the I/O controller models, their corresponding interfaces, and the interface

addressing syntax for each interface.

Table 7-1

Identifying Interface Addresses on the NPE-G1, NPE-G2, and Various I/O Controllers

Model

Interface

Numbers

Syntax

GigabitEthernet 0/1

GigabitEthernet 0/2

GigabitEthernet 0/3

NPE-G1 and NPE-G2

Gigabit Ethernet (port 0/1)¹

Gigabit Ethernet (port 0/2)

Gigabit Ethernet (port 0/3)

Gigabit Ethernet (port GE 0)

Chassis slot—always 0

Interface port—1, 2, or 3

gigabitethernet 0/0

fastethernet 0/0

fastethernet 0/1

fastethernet 0/0

C7200-I/O-GE+E

C7200-I/O-2FE/E

C7200-I/O-FE²

Chassis slot—always 0

Interface port—0

Ethernet (port E 0)

Chassis slot—always 0

Interface port—0

Fast Ethernet/Ethernet (port 0) Chassis slot—always 0

Interface port—0

Fast Ethernet/Ethernet (port 1) Chassis slot—always 0

Interface port—1

Fast Ethernet (MII or RJ-45)

Chassis slot—always 0

Interface port—0

—

C7200-I/O

C7200-I/O-FE-MII³

No interface ports

Fast Ethernet (MII)

—

fastethernet0/0

Chassis slot—always 0

Interface port—0

1. Both optical and copper ports report the same syntax. For example, Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 port 0/2 reports GigabitEthernet 0/2, as does Gigabit Ethernet

GBIC port 0/2. You can use only one port per interface, depending on the port selected using the media-type command.

2. The Product Number C7200-I/O-FE does not specify MII because both an MII and an RJ-45 receptacle are included.

3. The I/O controller with the Product Number C7200-I/O-FE-MII has a single MII Fast Ethernet receptacle only. Although still supported by Cisco, this

I/O controller with a single MII receptacle is no longer an orderable product as of May 1998.

The remainder of this section provides examples of show commands that pertain to the NPE-G1 and

NPE-G2. The output from the show commands is from the NPE-G1 or the NPE-G2.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-59

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Using show Commands to Check the Installation

To determine the hardware configuration of your NPE-G1 or NPE-G2, use the show version command.

The following example shows an NPE-G2 installed in a Cisco 7206VXR router:

Router# show version

Cisco IOS Software, 7200 Software (C7200-JS-M), Version 12.4(PC_D.051028) UBUILDIT Image,

Compiled Fri 28-Oct-05 00:30 by biff

(display text omitted)

Cisco 7206VXR (NPE-G2) processor (revision A) with 917504K/131072K bytes of memory.

Processor board ID 32428149

MPC7448 CPU at 1660Mhz, Implementation 0, Rev 2.0

6 slot VXR midplane, Version 2.8

(display text omitted)

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-60

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Using show Commands to Check the Installation

Use the show controllers command to display initialization block information, transmit ring, receive

ring, and errors for the interface controllers. The following example provides information about the

interfaces on the I/O controller C7200-I/O-2FE/E and the NPE-G1 installed in a Cisco 7206VXR router:

Router# show controllers

Interface FastEthernet0/0 (idb 0x62EC78B8)

Hardware is i82543 (Livengood) A1

network link is up

Config is Auto Speed, Full Duplex

loopback type is none

10/100 PHY is enabled (MII mode)

(display text omitted)

Interface FastEthernet0/1 (idb 0x62EBA1A4)

Hardware is i82543 (Livengood) A1

network link is up

Config is Auto Speed, Auto Duplex

loopback type is none

10/100 PHY is enabled (MII mode)

(display text omitted)

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-61

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Upgrading the Cisco IOS Image and the Boot Helper (Boot Loader) Image

5 minute output rate 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec

0 packets input, 0 bytes, 0 no buffer

Received 0 broadcasts, 0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles

0 input errors, 0 CRC, 0 frame, 0 overrun, 0 ignored

0 watchdog, 0 multicast, 0 pause input

0 input packets with dribble condition detected

0 packets output, 0 bytes, 0 underruns

0 output errors, 0 collisions, 4294967295 interface resets

0 babbles, 0 late collision, 0 deferred

0 lost carrier, 0 no carrier, 0 pause output

0 output buffer failures, 0 output buffers swapped out

Upgrading the Cisco IOS Image and the Boot Helper (Boot

Loader) Image

Should you ever upgrade the Cisco IOS image on your Cisco 7200 VXR router with an NPE-G1 or

NPE-G2, you need to ensure that you also upgrade your boot helper (boot loader) image.

The boot helper (boot loader) image resides in flash memory on the NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 and contains

a subset of the Cisco IOS software. This image is used to boot your router from the network or to load

Cisco IOS images onto the router. This image is also used if the system cannot find a valid system image.

Your boot helper (boot loader) image should correspond to the Cisco IOS release that is running on your

router.

•

The NPE-G1 requires the c7200-kboot boot helper image.

The NPE-G2 requires the c7200p-kboot-mz helper image.

The Cisco uBR7200-NPE-G1 requires the ubr7200-kboot-mz boot helper image.

The Cisco uBR7200-NPE-G2 requires the ubr7200p-kboot-mz boot helper image.

To upgrade your boot helper (boot loader) image, obtain the most current boot helper image through

Cisco.com and copy the new boot helper image to flash memory on your router. For information on how

to access Cisco.com, see the “Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request” section on

page -iv. Follow the Software Center link under Service and Support. You need to get a login code

from a Cisco representative to retrieve files from the Software Center.

To obtain a boot helper (boot loader) image from Cisco.com and upgrade your boot flash memory, do

the following:

Step 1

Step 2

Download the boot helper (boot loader) image from Cisco.com to a Trivial File Transfer Protocol

(TFTP) server.

Reformat the flash memory on your router as follows:

router# format bootflash:

Format operation may take a while. Continue? [confirm]

Format operation will destroy all data in "bootflash:". Continue? [confirm]

Formatting sector ...

Format of bootflash:complete

Note

Reformatting flash memory erases the current flash memory contents.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-62

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Upgrading ROMmon on the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2

Step

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-63

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Upgrading ROMmon on the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2

Using the show rom-monitor Command and ROMmon CLI showmon Commands

Use the show rom-monitor command if you are in Cisco IOS, or the ROMmon CLI showmon command

if you are in ROMmon, to determine which ROMmon images are available. See the following examples

for information shown in the output of the show rom-monitor or ROMmon CLI showmon commands:

•

If you are in Cisco IOS, use the show rom-monitor command:

Router> show rom-monitor

ReadOnly ROMMON version:

System Bootstrap, Version 12.2(20031011:151758)

Upgrade ROMMON version:

System Bootstrap, Version 12.2(20031011:151758)

Currently running ROMMON from Upgrade region

ROMMON from Upgrade region is selected for next boot

•

If you are in ROMmon, use the ROMmon CLI showmon command:

rommon 1 > showmon

ReadOnly ROMMON version is:

System Bootstrap, Version 12.2(20031011:151758) [biff]

Upgrade ROMMON version is:

System Bootstrap, Version 12.2(20031011:151758) [biff]

Upgrade ROMMON currently running

Upgrade ROMMON is selected for next boot

rommon 2 >

Using the upgrade rom-monitor file Command

Use the upgrade rom-monitor file file_id command to program the ROMmon.

See the following example of the upgrade rom-monitor file command:

Router# upgrade rom-monitor file tftp://00.0.00.0/biff/C7200_NPEG2_RMFUR.srec

Loading pgettner/C7200_NPEG2_RMFUR.srec from 00.0.00.0 (via GigabitEthernet0/1):

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

[OK - 392348 bytes]

This command will reload the router. Continue? [yes/no]:yes

ROMMON image upgrade in progress.

Erasing boot flash eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee

Programming boot flash ppppp

Now Reloading via hard watchdog timeout

Unexpected exception, CP

System Bootstrap, Version 12.2(20031011:151758) [biff]

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-64

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Troubleshooting the Upgrade

Running new upgrade for first time

System Bootstrap, Version 12.2(20031011:151758) [biff]

ROM:Rebooted by watchdog hard reset

C7200 platform with 1048576 Kbytes of main memory

Upgrade ROMMON initialized

rommon 1 >

Note

It is advisable to load a known good Cisco IOS image after a ROMmon upgrade.

Changing Preferences to Choose the Other ROMmon Image

To use the other ROMmon image, use one of the following commands to make the change depending on

whether you are in Cisco IOS or in ROMmon:

•

In Cisco IOS, use the upgrade rom-monitor preference command to change to the other ROMmon

image:

upgrade rom-monitor preference [readonly | upgrade]

Example:

Router: upgrade rom-monitor preference readonly

You are about to mark ReadOnly region of ROMMON for the highest boot preference.

Proceed? [confirm]

Done! Router must be reloaded for this to take effect.

•

In ROMmon, use the ROMmon CLI rommon-pref command to change to the other ROMmon

image:

rommon-pref [readonly | upgrade]

Example:

rommon 2 > rommon-pref readonly

Troubleshooting the Upgrade

This section contains sample error messages that appear if an upgrade fails, or if an upgrade is

successful, but the upgrade image is corrupted.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-65

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Troubleshooting the Upgrade

ROMmon Upgrade Error Messages

One if these error message appears when the upgrade has failed or if the upgrade image is corrupted:

•

ROMmon image is not compatible with the ReadOnly image:

Router: upgrade rom-monitor file tftp://00.0.00.0/biff/C7200_NPEG2_RMFUR.srec

Loading biff/C7200_NPEG2_RMFUR.srec from 00.0.00.0 (via GigabitEthernet0/1):

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

[OK - 392348 bytes]

ROMMON upgrade aborted; new ROMMON image version is not compatible with ReadOnly

ROMmon upgrade image is too big:

Router: upgrade rom-monitor file tftp://00.0.00.0/biff/C7200_NPEG2_RMFUR.srec

Loading biff/C7200_NPEG2_RMFUR.srec from 00.0.00.0 (via GigabitEthernet0/1):

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

[OK - 392348 bytes]

ROMMON upgrade aborted; new ROMMON is too big

Hardware does not support ROMmon upgrade:

Router: upgrade rom-monitor file tftp://00.0.00.0/biff/C7200_NPEG2_RMFUR.srec

Loading biff/C7200_NPEG2_RMFUR.srec from 00.0.00.0 (via GigabitEthernet0/1):

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

[OK - 392348 bytes]

ROMMON upgrade aborted; Current ROMMON does not support upgrade capability

Upgrade command with incorrect file type:

NPEG1-10# upgrade rom-monitor file tftp://00.0.00.0/biff/C7200_NPEG2_BOOT_ROM.bin

from 00.0.00.0 (via GigabitEthernet0/1):!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

[OK - 524288 bytes]

%Error:not srec file

A boot of a corrupted upgrade image:

System Bootstrap, Version 12.2(20031011:151758) [biff-npeg2-fur 135], DEVELOPMENT

SOFTWARE

Upgrade ROMMON corrupted.

Falling to ReadOnly ROMMON

ROM:Rebooted by watchdog hard reset

C7200 platform with 1048576 Kbytes of main memory

Readonly ROMMON initialized

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-66

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Upgrading FPGA on the NPE-G2

A field-programmable gate array (FPGA) device exists on the NPE-G2. FPGA devices do not exist on

other Cisco 7200 series routers network processing engines. FPGA devices are a type of

field-programmable device (FPD) that support separate software upgrades. Whenever a Cisco image is

released that supports the FPD feature, a companion FPD image package is also released for that

Cisco IOS software release. The FPD image package is available from Cisco.com and is accessible from

the Cisco Software Center page where you go to download your Cisco IOS software image.

Note

For Cisco IOS Release 12.4(4)XD, only a manual FPD upgrade of the NPE-G2 is supported.

For FPGA upgrade information and procedures, see the Field-Programmable Device Upgrades

document at:

http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/routers/7200/configuration/feature_guides/fpd.html

Troubleshooting the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2

For troubleshooting information, see the “Troubleshooting the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2” section on

page 10-2.

Fiber Optic Cleaning Information

We strongly recommend cleaning all optical fiber connections before reconnecting optical cables to

equipment. For information about cleaning optical connectors, see the Inspection and Cleaning

Procedures for Fiber-Optic Connections document and the Compressed Air Cleaning Issues for

Fiber-Optic Connections document.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-67

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and Configuration Information

Fiber Optic Cleaning Information

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

7-68

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C H A P T E R

Preparation for Installation

This chapter provides a list of parts and tools you need to remove and replace the network processing

engine (NPE) or network services engine (NSE) in:

•

Cisco 7200 series routers, including the Cisco 7200 VXR routers

Cisco uBR7200 series routers

This chapter also includes safety and ESD-prevention guidelines to help you avoid injury to yourself and

damage to the equipment. See the “Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request” section

on page iv for ordering and contact information. The following sections are found in this chapter:

•

Required Tools and Equipment, page 8-1

Software and Hardware Requirements, page 8-2

Table 8-4 lists the minimum software requirements for the NPE-400, NPE-G1, and NPE-G2.

Table 8-5 and Table 8-6 list the recommended minimum Cisco IOS software release to ensure

proper operation of the network processing engine or network services engine in supported router

platforms., page 8-4

Required Tools and Equipment

You need the following parts and tools to remove and replace an NPE or NSE in Cisco 7200 series

routers, Cisco 7200 VXR routers, or Cisco uBR7200 series routers:

•

A network processing engine or network services engine (NPE-100, NPE-150, NPE-175, NPE-200,

NPE-225, NPE-300, NPE-400, NSE-1, NPE-G1, or NPE-G2)

•

Number 2 Phillips screwdriver and a 3/16-inch flat-blade screwdriver

An 8-mm wrench or nut driver, or adjustable wrench (for connecting a grounding lug to a

Cisco uBR7200 series DC-input power supply)

•

A 7-mm wrench or nut driver, or adjustable wrench (for connecting the DC-input power lead

strain-relief cover to a DC-input power supply)

•

Standard wire stripper (for connecting power to an installed DC-input power supply)

Tape (for securing the switch handle of a DC circuit breaker in the off position)

Your own ESD-prevention equipment or the disposable grounding wrist strap included with all

field-replaceable units (FRUs)

•

An antistatic mat or surface, or static-shielding bag

Cable-management brackets and screws that ship with the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

8-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Preparation for Installation

Software and Hardware Requirements

If your router is mounted in a 4-post or telco-type rack, make sure you have at least one other person

available to assist you with removing the chassis from the rack.

Software and Hardware Requirements

The network processing engine and network services engine have different requirements for both

hardware and software. See the “NPE or NSE Requirements” section on page 8-2.

Note

Cisco IOS Release 12.2 changed the behavior of the ROM monitor (ROMmon) during the bootup

sequence. See “Boot Changes in Cisco IOS Release 12.2” section on page 10-2 for more information.

NPE or NSE Requirements

When installing an NPE-175, NPE-225, NPE-300, NPE-400, NPE-G2, or NSE-1 in a Cisco 7200 VXR

router or Cisco uBR7246VXR router that is using a previously purchased I/O controller, you must

upgrade the I/O controller boot helper image. The Cisco uBR7225VXR router does not support port

adapters or I/O controllers.

Note

Instructions for upgrading the boot helper image on the I/O controller are contained in the online

Memory Replacement Instructions for the Network Processing Engine or Network Services Engine and

Input/Output Controller publication.

Figure 8-1

Input/Output Controller—Showing Boot ROM and Flash SIMM

FAST ETHERNET INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER

SLOT

FE MII

ENABLED

AUX

FE LIN

CPU RESEIOT PWR OK

FE ENABLE

EJECT

SLOT

CONSOLE

PCMCIA

Temperature sensor

Console port

Captive installation screw

PC Card slots

Midplane connectors

Flash SIMM (U99)

Optional Fast Ethernet port (MII receptacle) 10 NVRAM (U41)

LEDs and CPU reset button

Auxiliary port

11 Temperature sensor

12 Boot ROM (U20)

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

8-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Preparation for Installation

Software and Hardware Requirements

Use the following table to determine supported NPEs or the NSE-1 for specific routers.

Table 8-1

Routers and Supported NPEs or NSE-1

Router

Supported NPEs or NSE

Cisco 7200 VXR routers

Cisco 7200 series routers

All NPEs and the NSE-1

NPE-100, NPE-150, NPE-175, NPE-200, and

NPE-225

Cisco 7206 as a router shelf in a Cisco AS5800

Universal Access Server

NPE-200

Cisco 7206VXR as a router shelf in a Cisco AS5800 NPE-300 and NPE-400

Universal Access Server

Cisco uBR7223 universal broadband router

Cisco uBR7246 universal broadband router

Cisco uBR7246VXR universal broadband router

NPE-150, NPE-200, and NPE-225

NPE-225, NPE-300, NPE-400, and

UBR7200-NPE-G1, UBR7200-NPE-G2

Cisco uBR7225VXR universal broadband router

UBR7200-NPE-G1, UBR7200-NPE-G2

Table 8-2

NPE or NSE Router and Port Adapter Compatibility Requirements

NPE or

NSE

Compatible Only With

Routers

Not Compatible or Supported With

Routers

Port Adapter

NPE-G2

NPE-G1

NSE-1

Cisco 7200 VXR routers

Cisco uBR7246VXR router Cisco 7200 series routers (7202,

Cisco uBR7225VXR router 7204, and 7206)

Keyed to prevent inserting in

—

Cisco 7200 VXR routers

Cisco uBR7246VXR router Cisco 7200 series routers (7202,

Cisco uBR7225VXR router 7204, and 7206)

Keyed to prevent inserting in

—

Cisco 7200 VXR routers

Keyed to prevent inserting in

Cisco 7200 series routers (7202,

7204, and 7206)

Note

The NSE-1 is not supported

in the Cisco uBR7200 series

routers, even though it is

physically capable of being

inserted into the router

chassis.

NPE-300 Cisco 7200 VXR routers

Keyed to prevent insertion in

Not supported with

the PA-A1 port

adapter

and

Cisco uBR7246VXR router Cisco 7200 series routers (7202,

7204, and 7206) and the

NPE-400

Cisco uBR7246 and

Cisco uBR7223 universal

broadband routers

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

8-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Preparation for Installation

Software and Hardware Requirements

Port Adapter Jacket Card Support

The Port Adapter Jacket Card inserts into the I/O controller slot of a Cisco 7200 VXR router when an

NPE-G2 or NPE-G1 is installed. The Port Adapter Jacket Card network processing engine support is

shown in Table 8-3.

Table 8-3

Network Processing Engines Supporting the Port Adapter Jacket Card

Network Processing Engine

NPE-G2

Software

Cisco IOS Release 12.4(4)XD2

Cisco IOS Release 12.4(4)XD

NPE-G1

Software Requirements

Table 8-4 lists the minimum software requirements for the NPE-400, NPE-G1, and NPE-G2. Table 8-5

and Table 8-6 list the recommended minimum Cisco IOS software release to ensure proper operation of

the network processing engine or network services engine in supported router platforms.

Table 8-4

Software Requirements for the NPE-400, NPE-G1, and NPE-G2

Network Processing Engine

Router Platform

Cisco 7200 Series

NPE-400

NPE-G1

NPE-G2

•

Cisco 7204VXR

and

Cisco 7206VXR

Cisco IOS Release

12.1(3a)E or later

releases of 12.1E

Cisco IOS Release Cisco IOS Release

12.2(4)BW

12.4(4)XD or later releases

of 12.4XD.

Cisco IOS Release

12.2(8)B or later

releases of 12.2 B

Cisco IOS Release

12.1(5)T or later

releases of 12.1T

Note

The NPE-G2¹

uses software

images that begin

with the prefix

“c7200p-”.

Cisco IOS Release

12.0(14)S or later

releases of 12.0S

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

8-4

Chapter 8 Preparation for Installation

Software and Hardware Requirements

Table 8-4

Software Requirements for the NPE-400, NPE-G1, and NPE-G2

Network Processing Engine

Router Platform

NPE-400

NPE-G1

NPE-G2

•

Cisco uBR7246VXR Cisco IOS Release

12.1(6)EC or later

Cisco IOS Release Cisco IOS Release

12.2(11)CX³with a 12.2(33)SCA⁴

releases of 12.1EC with special boot helper

Note

The NPE-G2 uses

software images

that begin with

the prefix

a special boot helper

image of 12.0(15)SC

image of

12.2(11)CX

[ubr7200-boot-mz.120- [ubr7200-boot-mz.

15.SC]

122-11.CX or

ubr7200-kboot-mz.

122-11.CX]

“ubr7200p-”.

Cisco IOS Release

12.2(4)BC1 or later

releases of 12.2BC

Cisco IOS Release

12.2(33)SCA or

later releases of

12.2S

Cisco IOS Release

12.3(9a)BC or later

releases of 12.3BC

•

Cisco uBR7225VXR

—

Cisco IOS Release Cisco IOS Release 12.2S

12.2(33)

Cisco IOS Release

12.2(33)SCA with a

boot helper image

[ubr7200-boot-mz.

122-33.SCA] or

[ubr7200-kboot-mz

.122-33.SCA]

1. The NPE-G2 has its own Cisco IOS software image with the prefix “c7200p-” in the software images filenames, including

the boot image. The NPE-G2 does not boot up with a software image with the prefix “c7200-”. Previous network processing

engines, or the network services engine, do not boot up with the “c7200p-” boot image. They use the prefix “c7200-”.

2. For information about the Cisco 7206 or Cisco 7206VXR as router shelves in the Cisco AS5800 Universal Access Server,

refer to the Cisco AS5800 Universal Access Server documentation listed in the “Related Documentation” section on page iii.

3. The Cisco uBR7246VXR universal broadband router requires the Cisco uBR7200-NPE-G1 version of the NPE-G1.

4. The Cisco uBR7246VXR universal broadband router requires the Cisco uBR7200-NPE-G2 version of the NPE-G2.

Table 8-5

Software Requirements for the NPE-100, NPE-150, NPE-200, and NPE-300

Network Processing Engine

NPE-100²NPE-150²

Router Platform¹

Cisco 7200 series

NPE-200²

NPE-300²

•

Cisco 7204VXR

and

Cisco IOS Release 12.0(2)XE2 or later releases of 12.0XE

Cisco IOS Release 12.0(3)T or later releases of 12.0T

Cisco 7206VXR

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

8-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Preparation for Installation

Software and Hardware Requirements

—

•

Cisco 7204 and

Cisco 7206

Cisco IOS Release

11.1(8)

Cisco IOS Release

11.1(5)

Cisco IOS Release 12.0

or 12.0S or later releases

of 12.0 or 12.0S

Cisco IOS Release

11.2(12)P or later

releases of 11.2P

Cisco IOS Release

11.3(2)T or later

releases of 11.3T

Cisco IOS Release

11.3(2)AA or later

releases of 11.3AA

•

Cisco 7202

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

8-6

Chapter 8 Preparation for Installation

Software and Hardware Requirements

Cisco uBR7200 series

Cisco uBR7246VXR

•

—

Cisco IOS Release

12.0(6)SC or later

releases of 12.0SC

Cisco IOS Release

12.1(3)EC1 or later

releases of 12.1 EC

Cisco IOS Release

12.2(4)BC1 or later

releases of 12.2BC

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

8-7

Chapter 8 Preparation for Installation

Software and Hardware Requirements

Table 8-6

Software Requirements for the NPE-175, NPE-225, and NSE-1 (continued)

NPE or NSE

NPE-175¹

Router Platform

NPE-225¹

NSE-1

•

Cisco 7204 and

Cisco 7206

Cisco IOS Release 12.0(4)XE or later releases of 12.0XE

Cisco IOS Release 12.0(5)T or later releases of 12.0T

—

Cisco uBR7200 series²

•

Cisco uBR7246VXR,

Cisco uBR7246, and

Cisco uBR7223

—

Cisco IOS Release

12.0(6)SC or later releases

of 12.0SC

—

Cisco IOS Release

12.1(3)EC1 or later releases

of 12.1 EC

Cisco IOS Release

12.2(4)BC1 or later releases

of 12.2BC

1. Cisco IOS Release 12.1(5)T and later releases of 12.1T require a minimum of 128 MB of SRAM or SDRAM.

2. Previous documents stated that the Cisco uBR7200 series routers supported the NPE-175. Because the NPE-175 has reached its end of life and was never

made orderable for the Cisco uBR7200 series routers, the NPE-175 is no longer shown as supported for the Cisco uBR7200 series routers.

Safety Guidelines

Following are safety guidelines that you should follow when working with any equipment that connects

to electrical power or telephone wiring.

Warning

Only trained and qualified personnel should be allowed to install or replace this equipment.

Statement 1030

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

8-8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Preparation for Installation

Software and Hardware Requirements

Safety Warnings

Warning

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

This warning symbol means danger. You are in a situation that could cause bodily injury. Before you

work on any equipment, be aware of the hazards involved with electrical circuitry and be familiar

with standard practices for preventing accidents. Use the statement number provided at the end of

each warning to locate its translation in the translated safety warnings that accompanied this

device. Statement 1071

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

Waarschuwing

BELANGRIJKE VEILIGHEIDSINSTRUCTIES

Dit waarschuwingssymbool betekent gevaar. U verkeert in een situatie die lichamelijk letsel kan

veroorzaken. Voordat u aan enige apparatuur gaat werken, dient u zich bewust te zijn van de bij

elektrische schakelingen betrokken risico's en dient u op de hoogte te zijn van de standaard

praktijken om ongelukken te voorkomen. Gebruik het nummer van de verklaring onderaan de

waarschuwing als u een vertaling van de waarschuwing die bij het apparaat wordt geleverd, wilt

raadplegen.

BEWAAR DEZE INSTRUCTIES

Varoitus

TÄRKEITÄ TURVALLISUUSOHJEITA

Tämä varoitusmerkki merkitsee vaaraa. Tilanne voi aiheuttaa ruumiillisia vammoja. Ennen kuin

käsittelet laitteistoa, huomioi sähköpiirien käsittelemiseen liittyvät riskit ja tutustu

onnettomuuksien yleisiin ehkäisytapoihin. Turvallisuusvaroitusten käännökset löytyvät laitteen

mukana toimitettujen käännettyjen turvallisuusvaroitusten joukosta varoitusten lopussa näkyvien

lausuntonumeroiden avulla.

SÄILYTÄ NÄMÄ OHJEET

Attention

IMPORTANTES INFORMATIONS DE SÉCURITÉ

Ce symbole d'avertissement indique un danger. Vous vous trouvez dans une situation pouvant

entraîner des blessures ou des dommages corporels. Avant de travailler sur un équipement, soyez

conscient des dangers liés aux circuits électriques et familiarisez-vous avec les procédures

couramment utilisées pour éviter les accidents. Pour prendre connaissance des traductions des

avertissements figurant dans les consignes de sécurité traduites qui accompagnent cet appareil,

référez-vous au numéro de l'instruction situé à la fin de chaque avertissement.

CONSERVEZ CES INFORMATIONS

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

8-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Preparation for Installation

Software and Hardware Requirements

Warnung

Avvertenza

Advarsel

Aviso

WICHTIGE SICHERHEITSHINWEISE

Dieses Warnsymbol bedeutet Gefahr. Sie befinden sich in einer Situation, die zu Verletzungen führen

kann. Machen Sie sich vor der Arbeit mit Geräten mit den Gefahren elektrischer Schaltungen und

den üblichen Verfahren zur Vorbeugung vor Unfällen vertraut. Suchen Sie mit der am Ende jeder

Warnung angegebenen Anweisungsnummer nach der jeweiligen Übersetzung in den übersetzten

Sicherheitshinweisen, die zusammen mit diesem Gerät ausgeliefert wurden.

BEWAHREN SIE DIESE HINWEISE GUT AUF.

IMPORTANTI ISTRUZIONI SULLA SICUREZZA

Questo simbolo di avvertenza indica un pericolo. La situazione potrebbe causare infortuni alle

persone. Prima di intervenire su qualsiasi apparecchiatura, occorre essere al corrente dei pericoli

relativi ai circuiti elettrici e conoscere le procedure standard per la prevenzione di incidenti.

Utilizzare il numero di istruzione presente alla fine di ciascuna avvertenza per individuare le

traduzioni delle avvertenze riportate in questo documento.

CONSERVARE QUESTE ISTRUZIONI

VIKTIGE SIKKERHETSINSTRUKSJONER

Dette advarselssymbolet betyr fare. Du er i en situasjon som kan føre til skade på person. Før du

begynner å arbeide med noe av utstyret, må du være oppmerksom på farene forbundet med

elektriske kretser, og kjenne til standardprosedyrer for å forhindre ulykker. Bruk nummeret i slutten

av hver advarsel for å finne oversettelsen i de oversatte sikkerhetsadvarslene som fulgte med denne

enheten.

TA VARE PÅ DISSE INSTRUKSJONENE

INSTRUÇÕES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURANÇA

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

8-10

Chapter 8 Preparation for Installation

Software and Hardware Requirements

Varning!

VIKTIGA SÄKERHETSANVISNINGAR

Denna varningssignal signalerar fara. Du befinner dig i en situation som kan leda till personskada.

Innan du utför arbete på någon utrustning måste du vara medveten om farorna med elkretsar och

känna till vanliga förfaranden för att förebygga olyckor. Använd det nummer som finns i slutet av

varje varning för att hitta dess översättning i de översatta säkerhetsvarningar som medföljer denna

anordning.

SPARA DESSA ANVISNINGAR

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

8-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Preparation for Installation

Software and Hardware Requirements

Aviso

INSTRUÇÕES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURANÇA

Este símbolo de aviso significa perigo. Você se encontra em uma situação em que há risco de lesões

corporais. Antes de trabalhar com qualquer equipamento, esteja ciente dos riscos que envolvem os

circuitos elétricos e familiarize-se com as práticas padrão de prevenção de acidentes. Use o

número da declaração fornecido ao final de cada aviso para localizar sua tradução nos avisos de

segurança traduzidos que acompanham o dispositivo.

GUARDE ESTAS INSTRUÇÕES

Advarsel

VIGTIGE SIKKERHEDSANVISNINGER

Dette advarselssymbol betyder fare. Du befinder dig i en situation med risiko for

legemesbeskadigelse. Før du begynder arbejde på udstyr, skal du være opmærksom på de

involverede risici, der er ved elektriske kredsløb, og du skal sætte dig ind i standardprocedurer til

undgåelse af ulykker. Brug erklæringsnummeret efter hver advarsel for at finde oversættelsen i de

oversatte advarsler, der fulgte med denne enhed.

GEM DISSE ANVISNINGER

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

8-12

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Preparation for Installation

Software and Hardware Requirements

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

8-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Preparation for Installation

Software and Hardware Requirements

Electrical Equipment Guidelines

Follow these basic guidelines when working with any electrical equipment:

•

Before beginning any procedures requiring access to the chassis interior, locate the emergency

power-off switch for the room in which you are working.

•

Disconnect all power and external cables before moving a chassis.

Do not work alone when potentially hazardous conditions exist.

Never assume that power has been disconnected from a circuit; always check.

Do not perform any action that creates a potential hazard to people or makes the equipment unsafe.

Carefully examine your work area for possible hazards such as moist floors, ungrounded power

extension cables, and missing safety grounds.

Telephone Wiring Guidelines

Use the following guidelines when working with any equipment that is connected to telephone wiring or

to other network cabling:

•

Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.

Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet

locations.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

8-14

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Preparation for Installation

Software and Hardware Requirements

•

Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been

disconnected at the network interface.

Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.

Electrostatic Discharge Prevention

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) damages equipment and impairs electrical circuitry. ESD occurs when

printed circuit boards are improperly handled and results in complete or intermittent failures.

The network processing engine or network services engine, I/O controller, port adapters, and

Cisco uBR7200 series cable interface line cards consist of printed circuit boards that are fixed in a metal

carrier. Electromagnetic interference (EMI) shielding, connectors, and a handle are integral components

of the carrier. Handle the network processing engine or network services engine, I/O controller, port

adapters, and Cisco uBR7200 series cable interface line cards by their carrier edges and handles; never

touch the printed circuit board or connector pins.

Figure 8-2 shows the location of a printed circuit board in a network processing engine or network

services engine, I/O controller, or Cisco uBR7200 series cable interface line card metal carrier. Do not

touch the printed circuit board when handling any of the components.

Figure 8-2

Handling the Network Processing Engine or Network Services Engine, the I/O

Controller, and the Cisco uBR7200 Series Cable Interface Line Cards—Side View

Printed circuit board

Metal carrier

Figure 8-3 shows the location of a printed circuit board in a port adapter metal carrier. Do not touch the

printed circuit board when handling a port adapter.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

8-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Preparation for Installation

Software and Hardware Requirements

Figure 8-3

Handling a Port Adapter—Side View

Metal carrier

Printed circuit board

Although the metal carrier helps to protect the printed circuit boards from ESD, wear a preventive

antistatic strap whenever handling the network processing engine or network services engine, I/O

controller, port adapters, or Cisco uBR7200 series cable interface line cards. Ensure that the strap makes

good skin contact and connect the strap’s clip to an unpainted chassis surface to channel unwanted ESD

voltages safely to ground.

If no wrist strap is available, ground yourself by touching the metal part of the chassis.

Caution

Make sure to tighten the captive installation screws on the network processing engine or network

services engine, Cisco uBR7200 series cable interface line cards, and the I/O controller (use a number 2

Phillips or a 3/16-inch flat-blade screwdriver). These screws prevent accidental removal, provide proper

grounding for the router, and help to ensure that the network processing engine or network services

engine, Cisco uBR7200 series cable interface line cards, and the I/O controller are properly seated in the

router midplane.

Following are guidelines for preventing ESD damage:

•

Always use an ESD wrist strap or ankle strap when installing or replacing the network processing

engine or network services engine, I/O controller, port adapters, or Cisco uBR7200 series cable

interface line cards. Ensure that the ESD strap makes contact with your skin.

Handle the network processing engine or network services engine, I/O controller, port adapters, or

Cisco uBR7200 series cable interface line cards by their metal carrier edges and handles only; avoid

touching the printed circuit board components or any connector pins.

When removing the network processing engine or network services engine, I/O controller, port

adapters, or Cisco uBR7200 series cable interface line cards, place them on an antistatic surface

with the printed circuit board components facing upward, or in a static shielding bag. If you are

returning an I/O controller, network processing engine or network services engine, port adapter, or

Cisco uBR7200 series cable interface line card to the factory, immediately place it in a static

shielding bag.

Caution

Periodically check the resistance value of the antistatic strap. The measurement should be within the

range of 1 to 10 megohms (Mohms).

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

8-16

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C H A P T E R

Removing and Installing the NPE or NSE

This chapter describes how to remove a network processing engine (NPE) or network services engine

(NSE) from supported platforms and also how to install a replacement network processing engine or

network services engine. This chapter provides instructions for the NPE-100 through NPE-400 and the

NSE-1. The NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 installation instructions are in Chapter 7, “Installing the NPE-G1 or

NPE-G2.”. This chapter contains the following sections:

•

Ensuring Easy Access to the Router, page 9-1

Removing and Replacing the NPE or NSE, page 9-2

Note

This chapter describes the installation of all processors except the NPE-G1, the NPE-G2, and the

Cisco uBR7200-NPE-G1. For those processors, please see Chapter 7, “NPE-G1 and NPE-G2

Installation and Configuration Information.”

Ensuring Easy Access to the Router

If your Cisco 7200 VXR router or Cisco uBR7246VXR router is installed in a standard 19-inch, 4-post

or telco-type rack, cables from other equipment in the rack might obstruct access to the rear of the router.

Also, rack power strips or other permanent fixtures may obstruct access to the router. Review the

following guidelines to ensure easy access to the rear of the router when it is installed in a rack. If the

router is not installed in a rack, or if you already have clear access to the rear of the router, proceed to

the “Removing and Replacing the NPE or NSE” section on page 9-2.

Use the following guidelines to ensure easy access to the rear of the router when it is installed in a rack:

•

Ensure that you have at least 3 to 4 feet (0.91 to 1.22 meters) of working space at the rear of the

router.

•

If cables from other equipment in the rack fall in front of the rear end of the router, carefully gather

the cables (using care not to strain or stress them) and use cable ties to anchor them away from the

rear of the router.

•

If access to the rear of the router is partially blocked by a power strip or some other permanent rack

fixture, detach the router from the rack and carefully slide it forward until there is enough clearance

to remove the power supply, the network processing engine, and the subchassis from the router.

Detailed steps for detaching the router from the rack are contained in the “Removing and Replacing

the NPE or NSE” section on page 9-2.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

9-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Removing and Installing the NPE or NSE

Removing and Replacing the NPE or NSE

Caution

Make sure that at least one other person is available to support the front of the router as you slide it out

from the rack and, if necessary, to continue to support it while you remove and insert the power supply,

network processing engine or network services engine, or subchassis.

Removing and Replacing the NPE or NSE

The procedures for removing and replacing an NPE or NSE are the same for all Cisco 7200 series

routers, including the Cisco 7206 and Cisco 7206VXR when used as router shelves in the Cisco AS5800

Universal Access Server. The procedures are also the same for the Cisco uBR7246VXR router.

The illustrations and procedures in the following sections apply to the Cisco 7200 series routers or

Cisco uBR7246VXR router and the Cisco AS5800 Universal Access Server router shelves unless

indicated otherwise.

Note

The NSE-1 is keyed for insertion in only Cisco 7200 VXR routers. The NSE-1 is not supported on the

Cisco uBR7246VXR universal broadband router, although it can be inserted into the router chassis.

The following sections explain how to remove and install an NPE or NSE-1 in the Cisco 7200 VXR

routers or Cisco uBR7246VXR router:

•

Powering Down the Router and Disconnecting Input Power, page 9-2

Removing the NPE or NSE, page 9-9

Removing and Installing Memory, page 9-11

Installing the NPE or NSE, page 9-21

Reconnecting Input Power and Powering Up the Router, page 9-23

Note

When installing an NPE-175, NPE-225, NPE-300, NPE-400, or NSE-1 in a Cisco 7200 VXR router that

is using a previously purchased I/O controller, you must upgrade the I/O controller boot helper image.

Instructions for upgrading the boot helper image on the I/O controller are contained in the online

Memory Replacement Instructions for the Network Processing Engine or Network Services Engine and

Input/Output Controller publication.

Powering Down the Router and Disconnecting Input Power

Complete the steps in the following sections to power down the router and disconnect input power.

Warning

This unit might have more than one power cord. To reduce the risk of electric shock, disconnect the

two power cords before servicing. Statement 83

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

9-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Removing and Installing the NPE or NSE

Removing and Replacing the NPE or NSE

Powering Down the Router

To power down a Cisco 7200 series router, Cisco 7204VXR or Cisco 7206VXR router, or

Cisco uBR7200 series router, complete the following steps:

Note

Before powering down the router, use the copy running-config startup-config command to save the

router’s running configuration to nonvolatile memory.

Step 1

Facing the rear of the router, place the power switch on the power supply in the off (O) position. Repeat

this action if a second power supply is installed in the router.

Note

When powering off the router, wait a minimum of 30 seconds before powering it on again.

Step 2

Observe the following items:

•

The green OK LED on the power supply turns off.

The fans stop operating.

The LEDs on the I/O controller turn off.

The LEDs on the port adapters turn off.

On a Cisco uBR7200 series router, the LEDs on the cable interface line cards turn off.

Caution

When the power switch on a Cisco uBR7200 series power supply is turned to the off (O) position, the

power supply enters a reset cycle for 90 seconds. Wait at least 90 seconds before turning the power

switch back to the on (|) position. If you do not wait the full 90 seconds, the power supply does not

restart.

This completes the procedure for powering down the router. For instructions on disconnecting power

from the Cisco 7200 series routers, Cisco 7200 VXR routers, or Cisco uBR7200 routers, see the

following sections:

•

Disconnecting AC-Input Power from a Cisco 7200 Series Router or Cisco 7200 VXR Router,

page 9-4

•

Disconnecting AC-Input Power from a Cisco uBR7200 Series Router, page 9-4

Disconnecting DC-Input Power from a Cisco 7200 Series Router or Cisco 7200 VXR Router,

page 9-5

•

Disconnecting DC-Input Power from a Cisco uBR7246 Router, page 9-7

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

9-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Removing and Installing the NPE or NSE

Removing and Replacing the NPE or NSE

Disconnecting AC-Input Power from a Cisco 7200 Series Router or Cisco 7200 VXR Router

To disconnect AC-input power from a Cisco 7200 series router or Cisco 7200 VXR router, complete the

following steps:

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

Unplug the input power cable from the power source.

Push up on the cable-retention clip that secures the input power cable to the router power supply.

Unplug the other end of the input power cable from the power supply. See Figure 9-1.

Figure 9-1

Disconnecting Power from a Cisco 7200 Series AC-Input Power Supply

Step 4

Repeat Step 1 through Step 3 if a second power supply is installed.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

9-4

Chapter 9 Removing and Installing the NPE or NSE

Removing and Replacing the NPE or NSE

Figure 9-2

Disconnecting Power from a Cisco uBR7200 Series AC-Input Power

Supply—Cisco uBR7246 Shown

AC-input receptacle

Power switch

Handle

Network processing engine

AC-input power supply

Step 4

Repeat Step 1 through Step 3 if a second power supply is installed.

This completes the procedure for disconnecting AC-input power from a Cisco uBR7200 series router.

Go to the “Removing the NPE or NSE” section on page 9-9.

Disconnecting DC-Input Power from a Cisco 7200 Series Router or Cisco 7200 VXR Router

To disconnect DC-input power from a Cisco 7200 series router or Cisco 7200 VXR router, complete the

following steps.

Warning

Before completing any of the following procedures, and to prevent short-circuit or shock hazards,

ensure that power is removed from the DC circuit. To ensure that all power is OFF, locate the circuit

breaker on the panel board that services the DC circuit, switch the circuit breaker to the OFF position,

and tape the switch handle of the circuit breaker in the OFF position. Statement 322

When you install the unit, the ground connection must always be made first and disconnected last.

Statement 42

Step 1

Step 2

At the rear of the router, check that the power switch on the power supply is in the off (O) position.

Ensure that no current is running through the –V and +V leads. To ensure that all power is off, locate the

circuit breaker on the panel board that services the DC circuit, switch the circuit breaker to the off

position, and tape the switch handle of the circuit breaker in the off position.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

9-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Removing and Installing the NPE or NSE

Removing and Replacing the NPE or NSE

Step 3

Remove the cable tie that secures the –V, +V, and ground leads to the power supply faceplate. Save the

cable tie.

Note

The cable tie that accompanied your Cisco 7200 series DC-input power supply can be removed

and replaced on the power supply without the use of a tool. If you secured the DC-input power

supply leads to the power supply faceplate using a different type of cable tie, use a wire stripper

to cut that cable tie from the power supply.

Step 4

Disconnect the –V and +V leads. You can leave the ground cable connected.

Figure 9-3

Disconnecting DC-Input Power from a Cisco 7200 Series Router or Cisco 7200 VXR

Router

Ground lead service loop

DC power leads

Cable tie

Power switch

Step 5

Using a 3/16-inch flat-blade screwdriver, loosen the screw below the +V lead receptacle and pull the lead

from the connector. Repeat this step for the –V lead and the ground lead.

Note

The color coding of the DC-input power supply leads depends on the color coding of the DC

power source at your site. Typically, green or green and yellow are used for ground. Make certain

that the lead color coding you choose for the DC-input power supply matches the lead color

coding used at the DC power source.

Step 6

Repeat Step 1 through Step 5 if a second power supply is installed.

This completes the procedure for disconnecting DC-input power from a Cisco 7200 series router or

Cisco 7200 VXR router. Go to the “Removing the NPE or NSE” section on page 9-9.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

9-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Removing and Installing the NPE or NSE

Removing and Replacing the NPE or NSE

Disconnecting DC-Input Power from a Cisco uBR7246 Router

To disconnect DC-input power from a Cisco uBR7346 router, complete the following steps.

Warning

Before completing any of the following steps, and to prevent short-circuit or shock hazards, ensure

that power is removed from the DC circuit. To ensure that all power is OFF, locate the circuit breaker

on the panel board that services the DC circuit, switch the circuit breaker to the OFF position, and

tape the switch handle of the circuit breaker in the OFF position. Statement 322

Warning

When you install the unit, the ground connection must always be made first and disconnected last.

Statement 42

Step 1

Step 2

At the rear of the router, check that the power switch on the power supply is in the off (O) position.

Ensure that no current is running through the –V and +V

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

9-7

Chapter 9 Removing and Installing the NPE or NSE

Removing and Replacing the NPE or NSE

Captive installation screw

Strain-relief cover

M4 nuts

M5 grounding receptacles

M5 grounding lug

Step 4

Using a 3/16-inch flat-blade screwdriver, loosen the screw below the +V lead receptacle and pull the lead

from the connector. Repeat this step for the –V lead only. See Figure 9-5.

Figure 9-5

Disconnecting Power from a Cisco uBR7246VXR Router DC-Input Power Supply

Power switch

Power receptacle

–V lead

M4 studs

+V lead

Handle

DC power supply

M5 grounding receptacles

M5 grounding lug

Step 5

Using an 8-mm wrench or nut driver (or adjustable wrench), loosen and remove the two M5 nuts that

secure the two-hole grounding lug to the grounding receptacle, and pull the grounding lug and lead from

the receptacle.

Note

The color coding of the DC-input power supply leads depends on the color coding of the DC

power source at your site. Typically, green or green and yellow are used for ground. Make certain

that the lead color coding you choose for the DC-input power supply matches the lead color

coding used at the DC power source.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

9-8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Removing and Installing the NPE or NSE

Removing and Replacing the NPE or NSE

Note

Repeat the Steps 1 to 5 to disconnect secondary power supply, if connected.

This completes the procedure for disconnecting DC-input power from a Cisco uBR7246VXR router.

Go to the following section, “Removing the NPE or NSE”.

Removing the NPE or NSE

To remove the NPE or NSE from a Cisco 7200 series router, Cisco 7204VXR or Cisco 7206VXR router,

or Cisco uBR7200 series router, complete the following steps.

Note

The weight of installed power supplies in your Cisco 7200 series router might make it difficult to remove

the network processing engine. If you have difficulty, first remove the power supplies from the chassis,

and then remove the network processing engine. See the “Removing and Replacing an AC-Input or

DC-Input Power Supply” section on page 10-14 for information on removing and replacing an installed

power supply.

This note does not apply to the Cisco uBR7200 series routers; the network processing engine is installed

above the power supplies in the Cisco uBR7200 series routers.

Note

If you have difficulty installing a network processing engine or I/O controller in the lowest slot of a

Cisco 7200 VXR router that is rack-mounted, remove the port adapters, network processing engine and

I/O controller from the chassis and reinstall them. Install the network processing engine and I/O

controller in the lowest slots first, then populate the slots above them, in a bottom-to-top order.

Step 1

Power down the router and disconnect the input power cable. (Refer to the “Powering Down the Router

and Disconnecting Input Power” section on page 9-2.)

Step 2

Step 3

Attach an ESD-preventive wrist strap between you and an unfinished chassis surface.

Using a number 2 Phillips or a 3/16-inch flat-blade screwdriver, loosen the two captive installation

screws on the faceplate of the network processing engine. (See Figure 9-6.)

If the router is not installed in a standard 19-inch, 4-post or telco-type rack, skip to Step 7. If the router

is installed in a rack, determine if any permanent rack fixtures, such as a power strip, are obstructing

access to the rear of the router. If a rack fixture is obstructing access to the router, proceed with Step 4.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

9-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Removing and Installing the NPE or NSE

Removing and Replacing the NPE or NSE

Figure 9-6

Cisco 7200 Series NPE or NSE Captive Installation Screws and Handle

NETWORK PROCESSING ENGINE-300

Captive installation screw

Handle

Network processing engine or network

services engine

AC-input power supply

Step 4

Using a 3/16-inch flat-blade screwdriver, loosen the screws that secure the router to the front mounting

strips of the rack.

Step 5

Step 6

Position at least one person in front of the rack to support the front underside of the router.

From the rear of the rack, carefully push the front of the router out of the rack until there is enough

clearance to remove the network processing engine.

Step 7

Grasp the network processing engine handle and carefully pull the network processing engine from its

chassis slot.

Caution

Step 8

Handle the network processing engine by the carrier edges and handle only; never touch the printed

circuit board components or connector pins.

Place the NPE or NSE on an antistatic surface with its printed circuit board components facing upward,

or in a static shielding bag. If you are returning the network processing engine to the factory,

immediately place it in a static shielding bag.

This completes the procedure for removing an installed NPE or NSE. For instructions on installing the

NPE or NSE, go to the “Installing the NPE or NSE” section on page 9-21.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

9-10

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Removing and Installing the NPE or NSE

Removing and Replacing the NPE or NSE

Removing and Installing Memory

This section provides instructions for removing and installing DRAM or SDRAM on a network

processing engine or network services engine.

Removing DRAM SIMMs

This section explains how to remove DRAM SIMMs that are installed on your network processing

engine. To remove the installed DRAM SIMMs, complete the following steps:

Note

The NPE-175, NPE-225, and NPE-300, and NSE-1 use SDRAM DIMMS. See the “Removing SDRAM

DIMMs” section on page 9-14 for DIMM replacement instructions.

Step 1

Step 2

Attach an ESD-preventive wrist strap between you and an unpainted router surface.

Place the network processing engine on an antistatic mat or surface (ensure that you are wearing an

antistatic device, such as a wrist strap).

Step 3

Step 4

Position the network processing engine or network services engine so that the handle is away from you

and the edge connector is toward you.

Locate the SIMMs.

For the location of the memory module you are replacing, find the illustration that corresponds to your

network processing engine in Chapter 1, “NPE-100, NPE-150, and NPE-200 Overview.”

Note

SIMMs installed in your system might look different from the SIMMS shown in the following

illustrations.

Step 5

Release the spring latches from the SIMM that you want to remove, and release the SIMM from the

socket. (See Figure 9-7.)

a. Pull the latches away with your thumbs, bracing your forefingers against the posts.

b. Raise the SIMM to a vertical position.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

9-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Removing and Installing the NPE or NSE

Removing and Replacing the NPE or NSE

Figure 9-7

Releasing the SIMM Spring Latches

Latch

Latch holes

Faceplate edge of the system card

Step 6

When both ends of the SIMM are released from the socket, grasp the ends of the SIMM with your thumb

and forefinger and pull the SIMM completely out of the socket. Handle the edges of the SIMM only;

avoid touching the memory modules, pins, or traces (the metal fingers on the connector side of the

SIMM).

Step 7

Step 8

Place the SIMM in an antistatic bag to protect it from ESD damage. You can use the SIMMs that you

remove in compatible equipment.

Repeat Step 4 through Step 7 for the remaining SIMMs.

This completes the SIMM removal procedure.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

9-12

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Removing and Installing the NPE or NSE

Removing and Replacing the NPE or NSE

Installing DRAM SIMMs

The DRAM SIMMs on the network processing engine are located in the following sockets:

•

U18, U25, U4, and U12 on the NPE-100 and the NPE-150 (See Chapter 1, “NPE-100, NPE-150, and

NPE-200 Overview,” Figure 1-1 and Figure 1-2.)

•

U11, U25, U42, and U52 on the NPE-200 (See Chapter 1, “NPE-100, NPE-150, and NPE-200

Overview,” Figure 1-3.)

Caution

Handle SIMMs by the edges only; avoid touching the memory modules, pins, or traces (the metal fingers

along the connector edge of the SIMM). (See Figure 9-8.)

To install memory SIMMs in the network processing engine, complete the following steps:

Step 1

Step 2

With the network processing engine in the same orientation as the previous procedure (with the handle

away from you and the edge connector toward you), install the first SIMM in the socket farthest from

you. Then install the last SIMM in the socket closest to you.

Remove a new SIMM from the antistatic bag.

Note

To prevent DRAM errors in the NPE-100, NPE-150, or NPE-200, and to ensure that your system

initializes correctly at startup, DRAM bank 0 (sockets U18 and U25, or U11 and U25) must

contain no fewer than two SIMMs of the same type. You can also install two SIMMs of the same

type in bank 1 (sockets U4 and U12, or U42 and U52); however, bank 0 must always contain the

two largest SIMMs.

Figure 9-8

Cisco 7200 Series Main Memory SIMM

Alignment holes

Polarization notch

Connector edge with notch

Step 3

Step 4

Step 5

Orient the SIMM so its connector edge (the metal fingers) is down and the component side is facing you.

(See Figure 9-8.)

Hold the sides of the SIMM between your thumb and middle finger, with your forefinger against the far

edge, opposite the connector edge.

Tilt the SIMM to approximately the same angle as the socket and insert the entire connector edge into

the socket.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

9-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Removing and Installing the NPE or NSE

Removing and Replacing the NPE or NSE

Caution

Step 6

When inserting SIMMs, use firm but not excessive pressure. If you damage a socket, you must return the

network processing engine or network services engine to the factory for repair.

Gently push the SIMM into the socket until the spring latches snap over the ends of the SIMM. If

necessary, rock the SIMM gently back and forth to seat it properly.

Step 7

Step 8

Repeat Step 2 through Step 6 for the remaining SIMMs.

When all SIMMs are installed, check all alignment holes (two on each SIMM) and ensure that the spring

latch is visible. If it is not, the SIMM is not seated properly. If any SIMM appears misaligned, carefully

remove it and reseat it in the socket. Push the SIMM firmly back into the socket until the spring latches

snap into place.

This completes the SIMM replacement procedure. Proceed to the “Installing the NPE or NSE” section

on page 9-21.

Removing SDRAM DIMMs

The procedures in this section are required only if you have an NPE-175, NPE-225, NPE-300, or NSE-1

and need to upgrade or replace the SDRAM DIMMs. On the NPE-175, NPE-225, and NSE-1, the

SDRAM DIMMs are located in socket U15. The two user-configurable SDRAM DIMMs on the

NPE-300 are located in sockets U45 and U44.

Note

The NPE-300 contains two banks of SDRAM. Both SDRAM banks are used for all packet memory

requirements; however, bank 0 is used exclusively for packet memory and is set at a fixed configuration

in the factory.

Bank 1 contains two user-configurable SDRAM slots, DIMM slot 2 and DIMM slot 3 (see Chapter 3,

“NPE-300 and NPE-400 Overview,” the “Components” section on page 3-2). Both slots in bank 1 can

be populated by DIMMs of different sizes; however, the size of the DIMM in slot 2 must be greater than

or equal to the size of the DIMM in slot

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

9-14

Chapter 9 Removing and Installing the NPE or NSE

Removing and Replacing the NPE or NSE

Figure 9-9

Opening DIMM Socket Latches

Release latches

SDRAM DIMM

Note

The SDRAM DIMM sockets on the NPE-175, NPE-225, and NPE-300 are parallel to the circuit

board. They are not tilted at an angle.

Step 5

With the DIMM socket latches open, grasp the ends of the DIMM between your thumbs and forefingers

and pull the DIMM completely out of the socket. (See Figure 9-10.)

Figure 9-10

Removing the DIMM

Notch

Metal fingers

Handle the edges of the DIMM only; avoid touching the memory modules, pin or traces (the metal

fingers on the connector side of the DIMM). (See Figure 9-11.)

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

9-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Removing and Installing the NPE or NSE

Removing and Replacing the NPE or NSE

Figure 9-11

Handling the DIMM

SDRAM DIMM

Caution

Step 6

To prevent ESD damage, handle the DIMM by the card edges only. Place a removed DIMM on an

antistatic mat and store it in an antistatic container.

Place the DIMM in an antistatic container to protect it from ESD damage.

This completes the DIMM removal procedure. Go to the “Installing SDRAM DIMMs” section on

page 9-16.

Installing SDRAM DIMMs

Caution

The DIMM is a sensitive component that is susceptible to ESD damage. Handle the DIMM by the edges

only; avoid touching the memory modules, pins, or traces (the metal fingers along the connector edge of

the DIMM). To prevent ESD damage, handle the DIMM as shown in Figure 9-11.

Note

The NPE-300 contains two banks of SDRAM. Both SDRAM banks are used for all packet memory

requirements; however, bank 0 is used exclusively for packet memory and is set at a fixed configuration

in the factory.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

9-16

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Removing and Installing the NPE or NSE

Removing and Replacing the NPE or NSE

With the network processing engine or network services engine in the same orientation as the previous

procedure, install the DIMM in the DIMM socket as follows:

Step 1

Step 2

Remove the new DIMM from its antistatic container.

Hold the DIMM between your thumbs and forefingers. (See Figure 9-11.)

Note

The 64-MB DIMM should be facing component-side-down.

Step 3

Step 4

Align the notch on the DIMM with the connector. The DIMM only inserts one way.

Insert the edge of the DIMM into the socket.

Note

The SDRAM DIMM sockets on the NPE-175, NPE-225, and NPE-300 are parallel to the circuit

board. They are not tilted at an angle.

Caution

Step 5

When inserting the DIMM, use firm but not excessive pressure. If you damage a socket, you will have

to return the NPE or NSE to the factory for repair.

Gently push the DIMM into the socket until the socket latches close over the ends of the DIMM. (See

Figure 9-12.) If necessary, rock the DIMM gently back and forth to seat it properly.

Figure 9-12

Inserting the DIMM

Step 6

Step 7

When the DIMM is installed, check to see it is seated properly. If the DIMM appears misaligned,

carefully remove it and reseat it in the socket. Push the DIMM firmly back into the socket until first one

and then the other socket latch moves into place.

Repeat Step 4 and Step 5 if you are replacing more than one DIMM.

This completes the DIMM replacement procedure. Go to the “Installing the NPE or NSE” section on

page 9-21.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

9-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Removing and Installing the NPE or NSE

Removing and Replacing the NPE or NSE

Removing a SDRAM SODIMM

This section provides a procedure for removing the small outline dual in-line memory module (SODIMM)

on the NPE-400.

Follow these steps to remove the existing SODIMM:

Step 1

Step 2

Remove the NPE-400 from the system.

Place the NPE-400 on an antistatic mat or pad and ensure that you are wearing an antistatic device, such

as a wrist strap.

Step 3

Locate the SODIMM (see Figure 9-13).

Figure 9-13

Location of SDRAM SODIMM on the NPE-400

NETWORK PROCESSING ENGINE-400

Temperature sensor (U31)

Keying post

Midplane connectors

Boot ROM (U7)

RM7000 microprocessor

System controller

Captive installation screw

Handle

Temperature sensor (U6)

10 SODIMM (J1)

11 Standoff and screw

Step 4

Locate the SODIMM standoff screw and use a Phillips screwdriver to remove it.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

9-18

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Removing and Installing the NPE or NSE

Removing and Replacing the NPE or NSE

Figure 9-14

Releasing the SODIMM Spring Latch

Spring latch on the release latch

SDRAM SODIMM

Step 5

Remove the SODIMM you want to replace by pulling outward on the SODIMM spring latches with your

thumbs.

The SODIMM springs up to allow you to easily pull it from the socket.

Caution

To prevent ESD damage, handle the SODIMM by the card edges only (as shown in Figure 9-14 on

page 9-19). Place the removed SODIMM on an antistatic mat and store it in an antistatic container.

Step 6

Step 7

Remove the SODIMM from the socket. Avoid touching the SODIMM as much as possible, particularly

the traces, the metal fingers on the connector side of the SODIMM.

Place the SODIMM in an antistatic container to protect it from ESD damage.

This completes the SODIMM removal procedure. Proceed to the next section to install the new

SODIMM.

Installing a SDRAM SODIMM

This section provides a procedure for replacing the SODIMM on the NPE-400.

The synchronous dynamic random-access memory (SDRAM) on the NPE-400 is contained in one small

outline dual in-line memory module (SODIMM) (see Figure 9-13 on page 9-18).

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

9-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Removing and Installing the NPE or NSE

Removing and Replacing the NPE or NSE

Caution

SODIMMs are sensitive components that are susceptible to ESD damage. Handle SODIMMs by the

edges only; avoid touching the memory modules, pins, or traces (the metal fingers along the connector

edge of the SODIMM). (See Figure 9-15.)

Figure 9-15

Handling a SODIMM

1. Press power switch to standby ( ).

Cisco 813 router

HUB

ETHERNET 10 BASE

Model Cisco 813

CONSOLE

ISDN S/T

NOR

ISDN

DSU

+5, -24, -71,

OFF

PHONE

VDC

5. Press power

switch to on ( ).

Desktop power

supply

2. Connect power

supply cable.

4. Connect ground

conductor to

grounding terminal

and power cord

plug to electrical outlet.

3. Connect power cord

to power supply.

Follow these steps to install the new SODIMM:

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

Remove a new SODIMM from the antistatic container.

Hold the SODIMM component-side-up, with the connector edge (the metal fingers) away from you.

Tilt the SODIMM to approximately the same angle as the socket, and insert the connector edge into the

socket.

Caution

When inserting the SODIMM, use firm but not excessive pressure. If you damage a socket, you will have

to return the NPE-400 to the factory for repair.

Step 4

Step 5

Gently press on the SODIMM until the SODIMM spring latches snap into place.

If the SODIMM appears misaligned, carefully remove it and reseat it in the socket. Push the SODIMM

gently back into the socket until the spring latches snap into place.

This completes the SDRAM SODIMM replacement procedure. To reinstall the NPE-400 in the chassis,

see the “Installing the NPE or NSE” section on page 9-21.

Checking a SDRAM Upgrade or Replacement

If, after a SDRAM upgrade or replacement, the system fails to boot properly, or if the console terminal

displays a checksum or memory error, ensure that the SIMM, DIMM, or SODIMM is installed correctly.

If necessary, shut down the system and remove the network processing engine or network services

engine. Check the SIMM, DIMM, or SODIMM by looking straight down it and then at eye level. The

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

9-20

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Removing and Installing the NPE or NSE

Removing and Replacing the NPE or NSE

SIMMs or DIMMs should be aligned at the same angle and the same height as others on the board when

properly installed. If the SIMM, DIMM, or SODIMM appears to stick out or rest in the socket at an odd

angle, remove it and reinsert it. Then replace the network processing engine or network services engine

and reboot the system for another installation check.

If after several attempts the system fails to restart properly, contact a service representative for

assistance. Before you call, note any error messages, unusual LED states, or other indications that might

help solve the problem.

Installing the NPE or NSE

Note

If you have difficulty installing a network processing engine or I/O controller in the lowest slot of a

Cisco 7200 VXR router that is rack-mounted, remove the port adapters, network processing engine and

I/O controller from the chassis and reinstall them. Install the network processing engine and I/O

controller in the lowest slots first, then populate the slots above them, in a bottom-to-top order.

To install an NPE or NSE in the router, complete the following steps:

Note

When installing an NPE-175, NPE-225, NPE-300, NPE-400, or NSE-1 in a Cisco 7200 VXR router that

is using a previously purchased I/O controller, you must upgrade the I/O controller boot helper image.

Instructions for upgrading the boot helper image on the I/O controller are contained in the online

Memory Replacement Instructions for the Network Processing Engine or Network Services Engine and

Input/Output Controller publication.

Step 1

Ensure that the router is powered down and the input power cable is disconnected from the router and

the power source. See the “Powering Down the Router and Disconnecting Input Power” section on

page 9-2.

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Attach an ESD-preventive wrist strap between you and an unfinished chassis surface.

Remove the new network processing engine or network services engine from its static shielding bag.

Using both hands, grasp the NPE or NSE by its metal carrier edges and orient it so that its printed circuit

board components are upward. (See Figure 9-16.)

Caution

Step 5

Handle the network processing engine or network services engine by the carrier edges and handle only;

never touch the printed circuit board components or connector pins.

Align the left and right edges of the network processing engine or network services engine printed circuit

board between the network processing engine slot guides.

Note

For the NPE-175 and NPE-225, align the left and right edges of the network processing engine

metal carrier into the guides.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

9-21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Removing and Installing the NPE or NSE

Removing and Replacing the NPE or NSE

Caution

Note

Do not align the network processing engine or network services engine metal carrier between the slot

guides (for all except the NPE-175 and NPE-225). Doing so damages components on the network

processing engine’s printed circuit board as you slide the network processing engine into its chassis slot.

The NPE-300 and NPE-400 are compatible only with the Cisco 7200 VXR router and

Cisco uBR7246VXR router; the NPE-300 and NPE-400 are keyed to prevent insertion in the Cisco 7200

series routers (7202, 7204, and 7206) and Cisco uBR7200 series routers (Cisco uBR7223 and Cisco

uBR7246).

Note

The NSE-1 is compatible with the Cisco 7200 VXR routers only. It is keyed to prevent insertion in the

Cisco 7200 series routers and the Cisco uBR7200 series routers.

Figure 9-16

Aligning the NPE Between the Slot Guides on a Cisco 7200 VXR Router

networking xxxx engine

Slot guides

Printed circuit board

Metal carrier

Network processing engine or network

services engine

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

9-22

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Removing and Installing the NPE or NSE

Removing and Replacing the NPE or NSE

Figure 9-17

Aligning the NPE Between the Slot Guides on a Cisco uBR7200

Series—Cisco uBR7246 Shown

Step 6

Step 7

Gently slide the network processing engine all the way into its chassis slot until you feel the connectors

seat with the router midplane.

Seat the network processing engine in the router midplane by tightening its captive installation screws

with a number 2 Phillips or a 3/16-inch flat-blade screwdriver.

Note

The network processing engine is not fully seated in the router midplane until you tighten its

captive installation screws.

Step 8

Step 9

If you removed power supplies from the router, replace the power supplies. (See the “Removing and

Replacing an AC-Input or DC-Input Power Supply” section on page 10-14 when replacing a power

supply in a Cisco 7200 series router.)

If you slid the front of the router out of the rack, slowly guide the router back into the rack.

Step 10 Use a 3/16-inch flat-blade screwdriver to tighten the screws that secure the router to the front mounting

strips of the rack.

This completes the procedure for replacing the network processing engine in a Cisco 7200 series router

or Cisco uBR7200 series router.

Reconnecting Input Power and Powering Up the Router

The following procedures explain how to reconnect input power to a Cisco 7200 series router,

Cisco 7200

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

9-23

Chapter 9 Removing and Installing the NPE or NSE

Removing and Replacing the NPE or NSE

Warning

Note

Read the installation instructions before you connect the system to its power source. Statement 10

When installing an NPE-175, NPE-225, NPE-300, NPE-400, or NSE-1 in a Cisco 7200 VXR router that

is using a previously purchased I/O controller, you must upgrade the I/O controller boot helper image.

Instructions for upgrading the boot helper image on the I/O controller are contained in the online

Memory Replacement Instructions for the Network Processing Engine or Network Services Engine and

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

9-24

Chapter 9 Removing and Installing the NPE or NSE

Removing and Replacing the NPE or NSE

Reconnecting AC-Input Power to the Cisco 7200 Series Router or Cisco 7200 VXR Router

To reconnect AC-input power to a Cisco 7200 series router or Cisco 7200 VXR router, complete the

following steps:

Step 1

At the rear of the router, check that the power switch on the power supply is in the off (O) position.

Figure 9-18

Connecting AC-Input Power to a Cisco 7200 Series Router

Power switch

AC power cable

POWER OK LED

Cable-retention clip

Handle with hole for nylon cable tie

Step 2

Step 3

Slide the cable-retention clip up away from the AC receptacle, and plug in the power cable.

Secure the cable in the power supply AC receptacle by sliding the cable-retention clip down until it snaps

around the connector. The cable-retention clip provides strain relief for the AC power cable.

Step 4

Plug the AC power supply cable into the AC power source.

Note

For the Cisco 7200 series routers, each AC-input power supply operating at 120 VAC requires a

minimum of 5A service.

We recommend powering the Cisco 7200 series routers from a 120 VAC, 15A receptacle U.S.

(240 VAC, 10A international) at the power source.

Step 5

Repeat Step 1 through Step 4 if a second power supply is installed.

This completes the steps for reconnecting AC-input power to a Cisco 7200 series router or

Cisco 7200 VXR router. Proceed to the “Powering Up the Router” section on page 9-33.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

9-25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Removing and Installing the NPE or NSE

Removing and Replacing the NPE or NSE

Reconnecting AC-Input Power to the Cisco uBR7200 Series Router

Figure 9-19

Connecting AC-Input Power to a Cisco uBR7200 Series Router

Cable-retention clip

Power receptacle

Captive installation screw

AC power cable

Power switch

Handle

To reconnect AC-input power to the Cisco uBR7200 series router complete, the following steps:

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

At the rear of the router, check that the power switch on the power supply is in the off (O) position.

Slide the cable-retention clip to the left away from the AC receptacle, and plug in the power cable.

Secure the cable in the power supply AC receptacle by sliding the cable-retention clip to the right until

it snaps around the connector. The cable-retention clip provides strain relief for the AC power cable.

Step 4

Plug the AC power supply cable into the AC power source.

Note

For the Cisco uBR7200 series routers, each AC-input power supply operating at 120 VAC

requires a minimum of 7A service.

We recommend powering the Cisco uBR7200 series routers from a 120 VAC, 15A receptacle

U.S. (240 VAC, 10A international) at the power source.

Step 5

Repeat Step 1 through Step 4 if a second power supply is installed.

This completes the steps for reconnecting AC-input power to a Cisco uBR7200 series router. Proceed to

the “Powering Up the Router” section on page 9-33.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

9-26

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Removing and Installing the NPE or NSE

Removing and Replacing the NPE or NSE

Reconnecting DC-Input Power to a Cisco 7200 Series Router or Cisco 7200 VXR Router

To reconnect DC-input power to a Cisco 7200 series router or Cisco 7200 VXR router, complete the

following steps:

Note

The color coding of the DC-input power supply leads depends on the color coding of the DC power

source at your site. Typically, green or green and yellow are used for ground. Make certain that the lead

color coding you choose for the DC-input power supply matches the lead color coding used at the DC

power source.

Warning

Before completing any of the following steps, and to prevent short-circuit or shock hazards, ensure

that power is removed from the DC circuit. To ensure that all power is OFF, locate the circuit breaker

on the panel board that services the DC circuit, switch the circuit breaker to the OFF position, and

tape the switch handle of the circuit breaker in the OFF position. Statement 322

When installing the unit, the ground connection must always be made first and disconnected last.

Statement 42

Step 1

Step 2

At the rear of the router, check that the power switch on the power supply is in the off (O) position.

Ensure that no current is running through the –V and +V leads. To ensure that all power is off, locate the

circuit breaker on the panel board that services the DC circuit, switch the circuit breaker to the off

position, and tape the switch handle of the circuit breaker in the off position.

Figure 9-20

Connecting DC-Input Power to a Cisco 7200 Series Router

Power switch

Cable tie

Ground lead service loop

DC power leads

Step 3

If necessary, use a wire stripper to strip approximately 0.55 inch (14 mm) from the –V, +V, and ground

leads. (See Step 3

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

9-27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Removing and Installing the NPE or NSE

Removing and Replacing the NPE or NSE

Figure 9-21

Stripping the DC-Input Lines

0.55 in. (14 mm)

Step 4

Step 5

Insert the stripped end of the ground lead all the way into the ground lead receptacle on the DC-input

power supply and tighten the receptacle screw using a 3/16-inch flat-blade screwdriver.

Insert the stripped end of the +V lead all the way into the +V lead receptacle and tighten the receptacle

screw using the same 3/16-inch flat-blade screwdriver. Repeat this step for the –V lead.

Note

Make sure that the entire stripped end of each lead is inserted all the way into its receptacle. If any

exposed wire at the stripped end of a lead is visible after inserting the lead into its receptacle, remove

the lead from the receptacle, use the wire stripper to cut the stripped end of the lead, and repeat through

Step 5.

Step 6

After tightening the receptacle screws for the ground, +V, and –V DC-input leads, secure the leads to the

power supply faceplate.

Use the cable tie you saved earlier in this procedure to secure the three leads.

Note

When securing the ground, +V, and –V DC-input leads to the power supply faceplate, leave a

small service loop in the ground lead to ensure that it is the last lead to disconnect from the power

supply if a great deal of strain is placed on all three leads. (See Figure 9-20.)

Step 7

Restore current to the –V and +V leads.

Note

For the Cisco 7200 series routers:

– Each DC-input power supply operating at 24 VDC requires a minimum of 19A service.

– Each DC-input power supply operating at 48 VDC requires a minimum of 13A service.

– Each DC-input power supply operating at 60 VDC requires a minimum of 8A service.

This product relies on the building’s installation for short-circuit (overcurrent) protection.

Ensure that a listed and certified fuse or circuit breaker, 35A minimum 60 VDC, is used on all

current-carrying conductors. Site wiring and circuit breakers need to be sized to accommodate

the maximum values for safety reasons.

Step 8

Repeat Step 1 through Step 7 if a second power supply is installed.

This completes the steps for reconnecting DC-input power to a Cisco 7200 series router or a

Cisco 7200 VXR router. Proceed to the “Powering Up the Router” section on page 9-33.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

9-28

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Removing and Installing the NPE or NSE

Removing and Replacing the NPE or NSE

Reconnecting DC-Input Power to a Cisco uBR7246VXR Router

To reconnect DC-input power to a Cisco uBR7246VXR router, complete the following steps:

Note

The color coding of the DC-input power supply leads depends on the color coding of the DC power

source at your site. Typically, green or green and yellow are used for ground. Make certain that the lead

color coding you choose for the DC-input power supply matches the lead color coding used at the DC

power source.

Warning

Before completing any of the following steps, and to prevent short-circuit or shock hazards, ensure

that power is removed from the DC circuit. To ensure that all power is OFF, locate the circuit breaker

on the panel board that services the DC circuit, switch the circuit breaker to the OFF position, and

tape the switch handle of the circuit breaker in the OFF position. Statement 322

When installing the unit, the ground connection must always be made first and disconnected last.

Statement 42

Step 1

Step 2

At the rear of the router, check that the power switch on the power supply is in the off (O) position.

Ensure that no current is running through the –V and +V leads. To ensure that all power is off , locate

the circuit breaker on the panel board that services the DC circuit, switch the circuit breaker to the off

position, and tape the switch handle of the circuit breaker in the off position.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

9-29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Removing and Installing the NPE or NSE

Removing and Replacing the NPE or NSE

Figure 9-22

Connecting DC-Input Power to a Cisco uBR7246VXR Router

Power switch

Power receptacle

–V lead

M4 studs

+V lead

Handle

Captive installation screw

M5 grounding receptacles

M5 grounding lug

Step 3

Note

If necessary, use a wire stripper to strip approximately 0.55 inch (14 mm) from the –V, +V, and ground

leads.

The ground lead for the Cisco uBR7246VXR router DC-input power supply consists of a two-hole

grounding lug that connects to an M5 grounding receptacle; you do not need to strip this ground lead.

Figure 9-23

Stripping the DC-Input Lines

0.55 in. (14 mm)

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

9-30

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Removing and Installing the NPE or NSE

Removing and Replacing the NPE or NSE

Step 4

Step 5

Connect the two-hole grounding lug on the grounding lead to the M5 grounding receptacles with the M5

nuts. Tighten the nuts using an 8-mm wrench or nut driver (or adjustable wrench). (See Figure 9-24.)

Insert the stripped end of the +V lead all the way into the +V lead receptacle and tighten the receptacle

screw using the 3/16-inch flat-blade screwdriver. Repeat this step for the –V lead.

Note

Make sure that the entire stripped end of each lead is inserted all the way into its receptacle. If any

exposed wire at the stripped end of a lead is visible after inserting the lead into its receptacle, remove

the lead from the receptacle, use the wire stripper to cut the stripped end of the lead, and repeat through

Step 5.

Step 6

Step 7

After tightening the receptacle screw or nuts for the ground, +V, and –V DC-input leads, secure the leads

to the power supply faceplate.

Run the +V and –V leads between the two strain-relief studs on the power supply faceplate.

Note

A service loop is not required in the lead attached to the grounding lug because this lead is

separate from the +V and –V leads and is secured by two M5 nuts to the M5 receptacles.

Step 8

Replace the strain-relief cover over the +V and –V leads and secure the cover to the strain-relief studs

with the two M4 nuts using the 7-mm wrench or nut driver (or adjustable wrench).

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

9-31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Removing and Installing the NPE or NSE

Removing and Replacing the NPE or NSE

Figure 9-24

Replacing the Strain-Relief Cover on a Cisco uBR7246VXR Router DC-Input Power

Supply

Power switch

Power receptacle

–V lead

+V lead

Captive installation screw

M5 grounding receptacles

M5 grounding lug

Strain-relief cover

M4 nuts

Step 9

Restore current to the –V and +V leads.

Note

For the Cisco uBR7246VXR router, each DC-input power supply rating is 14A, 700 volt ampere

(VA).

This product relies on the building’s installation for short-circuit (overcurrent) protection.

Ensure that a listed and certified fuse or circuit breaker, 35A minimum 60 VDC, is used on all

current-carrying conductors. Site wiring and circuit breakers need to be sized to accommodate

the maximum values for safety reasons.

Step 10 Repeat Step 1 through Step 9 if a second power supply is installed.

This completes the steps for reconnecting DC-input power to a Cisco uBR7246VXR router. Proceed to

the following section, “Powering Up the Router.”

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

9-32

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Removing and Installing the NPE or NSE

Removing and Replacing the NPE or NSE

Powering Up the Router

To power up a Cisco 7200 series router, Cisco 7200 VXR router, or Cisco uBR7200 series router that

has an installed power supply, complete the following steps:

Step 1

Check for the following:

–

Each port adapter is inserted in its slot, and its respective port adapter lever is in the locked

position.

–

The network processing engine and the I/O controller are inserted in their respective slots, and

the captive installation screws are tightened.

–

All network interface cables are connected to the port adapters.

Each cable interface line card is inserted in its slot, and its respective captive installation screws

are tightened (Cisco uBR7200 series router only).

–

A PC Card or Flash Disk is installed in one of the PC Card slots.

Note

The Flash Disk can be installed in either slot 0 or slot 1 of the Cisco 7200 series router.

–

Each AC-input power cable is connected and secured with the cable-retention clip (AC-input

power supplies only).

For a Cisco 7200 series router, each DC lead is connected and secured to the power supply

faceplate with a cable tie.

For a Cisco uBR7200 series router, each DC lead is connected with M5 nuts for the grounding

receptacle and the strain-relief cover over the +V and –V leads (DC-input power supplies only).

–

Each DC lead is connected and secured to the power source (DC-input power supplies only).

Ensure that the tape (that you applied earlier) is removed from the circuit breaker switch handle,

and power is restored by moving the circuit breaker handle to the on (|) position (DC-input

power supplies only).

–

The console terminal is turned on.

Caution

When the power switch on a Cisco uBR7200 series power supply is turned to the off (O) position, the

power supply enters a reset cycle for 90 seconds. Wait at least 90 seconds before turning the power

switch back to the on (|) position. If you do not wait the full 90 seconds, the power supply does not

restart.

Step 2

Note

At the rear of the router, place the power switch on the power supply in the on (|) position. Repeat this

step if a second power supply is installed in the router. The green OK LED on the power supply turns on.

When powering on the router, wait a minimum of 30 seconds before powering it off again.

Listen for the fans; you should immediately hear them operating.

Step 3

Step 4

During the boot process, observe the system LEDs. The LEDs on most of the port adapters go on and off

in an irregular sequence. Some may go on, go out, and go on again for a short time. On the I/O controller,

the I/O power OK LED goes on immediately.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

9-33

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Removing and Installing the NPE or NSE

Removing and Replacing the NPE or NSE

Step 5

Observe the initialization process. When the system boot is complete (a few seconds), the network

processing engine or network services engine begins to initialize the port adapters and the I/O controller.

During this initialization, the LEDs on each port adapter behave differently (most flash on and off). The

enabled LED on each port adapter and Cisco uBR7200 series cable interface line card goes on when

initialization is completed, and the console screen displays a script and system banner similar to the

following:

Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software

IOS (tm) 7200 Software (C7200-J-M), 11.3(2)T

Compiled Sun 22-Feb-98 06:00 by Biff

This completes the procedures for connecting input power and powering up the router. This also

completes the procedure for installing the network processing engine or network services engine in a

Cisco 7200 series router, Cisco 7200 VXR router, or Cisco uBR7200 series router.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

9-34

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C H A P T E R

Configuration Tasks and Troubleshooting

Information

This chapter provides configuration and troubleshooting information. Troubleshooting information

includes general show commands, show commands specific to the NSE-1, and error messages and the

like. Instructions for removing a power supply for easier removal or installation of the network services

engine are also provided. The following topics are covered in this chapter:

•

NPE Configuration Tasks, page 10-1

NSE Configuration Tasks, page 10-1

Boot Changes in Cisco IOS Release 12.2, page 10-2

Troubleshooting the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2, page 10-2

.Troubleshooting the NPE-100 Through NPE-400, page 10-4

NPE or NSE show Commands, page 10-4

NSE-1 show Commands, page 10-6

NSE-1 Error Messages, page 10-10

Using Debugging Commands and PXF, page 10-11

PXF Troubleshooting Information, page 10-11

Removing and Replacing an AC-Input or DC-Input Power Supply, page 10-14

Fiber Optic Cleaning Information, page 10-17

NPE Configuration Tasks

Network processing engines (NPEs) NPE-100 through NPE-400 are not configurable. There are no tasks

to perform.

For NPE-G1and NPE-G2 configuration tasks, see Chapter 7, “NPE-G1 and NPE-G2 Installation and

Configuration Information.”

NSE Configuration Tasks

The PXF processor is turned on by default. If it is ever disabled, you must enable it to take advantage of

IP packet switching and feature acceleration.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

10-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 10 Configuration Tasks and Troubleshooting Information

Boot Changes in Cisco IOS Release 12.2

Note

Before enabling the PXF processor, you must have IP routing and IP CEF switching turned on.

To manually disable or enable the PXF processor, use the ip pxf global command. To see a current list

of Cisco IOS features supported by the PXF processor, go to Cisco.com and search for Cisco 7200

product literature for the NSE-1.

Boot Changes in Cisco IOS Release 12.2

Cisco IOS Release 12.2 changed the behavior of the ROM monitor (ROMmon) during the bootup

sequence. Previously, users could issue the break signal during the bootup sequence to break into

ROMmon, and then immediately boot a new Cisco IOS image using the boot command.

This behavior is no longer allowed when the router is using a boot image that is based on Cisco IOS

Release 12.2, because interrupting the boot process could leave the hardware and software registers in

an unknown state. Instead, use the following procedure when using a router with a Cisco IOS Release

12.2 boot image:

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

At the router console prompt, send a BREAK signal to interrupt the boot process and enter ROMmon.

Set the configure register to boot into ROMmon by using the confreg 0x0 command.

Use the reset command to reset the NPE and boot into ROMmon. This ensures a clean boot into

ROMmon, with all registers set to a known state.

Step 4

Step 5

Set the configuration register to boot a Cisco IOS image by using the confreg 0x2102 command.

Use the boot command to boot the desired Cisco IOS image.

Troubleshooting the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2

The procedures in this section assume that the NPE-G1, NPE-G2, Cisco uBR7200-NPE-G1, or

Cisco uBR7200-NPE-G2 is installed without an I/O controller. Unless otherwise indicated, all

references to NPE-G1 refer to both the NPE-G1 and Cisco uBR7200-NPE-G1. Also, unless otherwise

indicated, all references to NPE-G2 refer to both the NPE-G2 and Cisco uBR7200-NPE-G2.

Note

The NPE-G2 has its own Cisco IOS software image with the prefix “c7200p-” in the software images

filenames, including the boot image. The NPE-G2 does not boot up with a software image with the prefix

“c7200-”. Previous network processing engines, or the network services engine, do not boot up with the

“c7200p-” boot image. They use the prefix “c7200-”.

The Cisco uBR7200-NPE-G2 has its own Cisco IOS software image with the prefix “ubr7200p”.

For NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 ROMmon upgrade error messages, see the “ROMmon Upgrade Error

Messages” section on page 7-66.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

10-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 10 Configuration Tasks and Troubleshooting Information

Troubleshooting the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2

Caution

If an NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 is installed in a router with either an C7200-I/O-GE+E or C7200-I/O-2FE/E

I/O controller, or if a Cisco uBR7200-NPE-G1 will be installed in a router with a C7200-I/O-2FE/E I/O

controller, copy your running configuration to a TFTP server or Flash Disk, not a PC Card. PC Cards are

not supported on these I/O controllers when an NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 are present. If you copy the running

configuration to a PC Card with these I/O controllers present, you will not be able to retrieve the running

configuration after the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 is installed.

Note

If an I/O controller is installed with the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2, only the EN (Enable) LED and LINK LED

information in this section is applicable.

The procedures in this section assume that the NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 and the router itself are in the original

factory configuration, and that you have not made changes to your configuration file.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

10-3

Chapter 10 Configuration Tasks and Troubleshooting Information

.Troubleshooting the NPE-100 Through NPE-400

•

Check the Cisco IOS release running on the router. For minimum software release information, see

the “Software Requirements” section on page 8-4

.Troubleshooting the NPE-100 Through NPE-400

The procedures in this section assume that the I/O controller, network processing engine or network

services engine, and the router itself are in the original factory configuration, and that you have not made

any changes to your configuration file.

If the I/O controller ENABLED LED does not go on as expected, make sure the power to the router is

turned off, reseat the network processing engine or network services engine in its slot, and restart the

router.

If the ENABLED LED remains off, the system detected a processor hardware failure. (This LED should

be on in normal operation.) Contact a service representative for instructions.

Check the Cisco IOS release running on the router. For minimum software release information, see the

“Software Requirements” section on page 8-4.

NPE or NSE show Commands

Use the global show version or show c7200 commands to obtain information about the NPE or NSE,

hardware, and software installed on your router. Examples of each follow.

Using the show version Command

Use the show version command to display the configuration of the system hardware including the NPE

or NSE and the software version.

The following example of the show version command identifies an NPE-400 installed in a

Cisco 7206VXR router:

Router# show version

Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software

IOS (tm) 7200 Software (C7200-P-M), Released Version 12.1(20000622:181759)

Compiled Thu 22-Jun-00 11:18 by BIFF

Image text-base:0x60008950, data-base:0x60BD8000

(display text omitted)

cisco 7206VXR (NPE400) processor (revision 0xFF) with 114688K/16384K bytes

of memory.

Processor board ID 8771013

R7000 CPU at 350Mhz, Implementation 39, Rev 2.1, 256KB L2, 4096KB L3 Cache

6 slot VXR midplane, Version 2.1

(display text omitted)

The following example shows an NSE-1 installed in a Cisco 7206VXR router:

Router# show version

Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software

IOS (tm) 7200 Software (C7200-JS-M), Version 12.1(1)E

Compiled Wed 22-Mar-00 08:37 by Biff

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

10-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 10 Configuration Tasks and Troubleshooting Information

NPE or NSE show Commands

Image text-base:0x60008900, data-base:0x6141C000

(display text omitted)

cisco 7206VXR (NSE-1) processor (revision B) with 57344K/8192K bytes of memory.

R7000 CPU at 262Mhz, Implementation 39, Rev 1.0, 256KB L2 Cache6 slot VXR midplane,

Version 2.0

(display text omitted)

PXF processor tmc is running.

6 FastEthernet/IEEE 802.3 interface(s)

10 Serial network interface(s)

2 HSSI network interface(s)

2 Channelized T3 port(s)

125K bytes of non-volatile configuration memory.

(display text omitted)

Using the show c7200 Command

Use the show c7200 command to obtain information about the router.

Router# show c7200

Network IO Interrupt Throttling:

throttle count=0, timer count=0

active=0, configured=0

netint usec=4000, netint mask usec=200

C7200 Midplane EEPROM:

Hardware revision 2.0

Board revision A0

Serial number

Test history

16061833

0x0

Part number

RMA number

73-3223-05

00-00-00

MAC=00b0.4aae.4000, MAC Size=1024

EEPROM format version 1, Model=0x6

EEPROM contents (hex):

0x20:01 06 02 00 00 F5 15 89 49 0C 97 05 00 B0 4A AE

0x30:40 00 04 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 13 50 00 00 FF 00

C7206VXR CPU EEPROM:

Hardware revision 1.2

Board revision A0

Serial number

Test history

15053437

0x0

Part number

RMA number

73-3453-04

00-00-00

EEPROM format version 1

EEPROM contents (hex):

0x20:01 C2 01 02 00 E5 B2 7D 49 0D 7D 04 00 00 00 00

0x30:50 00 00 00 00 01 14 00 00 00 FF FF FF FF FF FF

C7200 PE EEPROM:

Hardware Revision

Top Assy. Part Number

Part Number

:1.0

:800-05272-04

:73-4068-02

:A0

Board Revision

PCB Serial Number

RMA History

:12342775

:00

Fab Version

:02

Fab Part Number

Product Number

:28-3146-02

:NSE1

EEPROM format version 4

EEPROM contents (hex):

0x00:04 FF 40 00 DE 41 01 00 C0 46 03 20 00 14 98 04

0x10:82 49 0F E4 02 42 41 30 C1 8B 31 32 33 34 32 37

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

10-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 10 Configuration Tasks and Troubleshooting Information

NSE-1 show Commands

0x20:37 35 20 20 20 04 00 02 02 85 1C 0C 4A 02 CB 84

0x30:4E 53 45 31 FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF

0x40:FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF

0x50:FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF

0x60:FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF

0x70:FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF

Using the show environment Command with the NPE-G2—NPE-G2 -Specific Output

The output for the show environment command has changed slightly for the NPE-G2. See the NPE-G2

Support for the show environment Command document for information about changes to the output of

the show environment command with the NPE-G2 at:

http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/ios/12_4/12_4x/12_4_4xd/showenv2.html.

NSE-1 show Commands

Following are five NSE-1-specific show pxf commands and several subcommands. Included in this

section are examples for each command.

•

show pxf accounting ?

–

show pxf accounting summary

show pxf accounting interface

•

show pxf crash

show pxf info

show pxf interface

show pxf feature ?

Sample output for these commands and subcommands follows.

Using the show pxf accounting ? Command and Subcommands

The following is an example of the show pxf accounting ? command with sample output:

Router# show pxf accounting ?

ATM

Ethernet

ATM interface

IEEE 802.3

FastEthernet FastEthernet IEEE 802.3

Hssi

Null

High Speed Serial Interface

Null interface

POS

Serial

summary

Packet over Sonet

Serial

PXF summary statistics

The following is an example of the show pxf accounting summary command with sample output:

Router# show pxf accounting summary

Pkts

Total

Dropped

RP Processed

Ignored

PXF complex busy

: 8%

PXF input pipeline full: 0%

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

10-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 10 Configuration Tasks and Troubleshooting Information

NSE-1 show Commands

PXF Statistic:

Packets RP -> PXF:

switch ip:

switch raw:

qos fastsend:

qos enqueue:

Total:

Packets PXF -> RP:

qos pkts:

fast pkts:

drops:total

punts:total

not IP :

CEF receive :

Total:

Packets ignored:

shadow ring full:

in ring full:

ring space:

shadow ring: 16382

inring:

995

PXF inactive:

tx credits:

holdq enqueues:

interrupts:

delayed credits:

requeue drops:

pending read bytes: 0

session stats:

L2TP tunnel read:

Interface

Et0/0

Gi0/0

Fa1/0

Fa4/0

Vt1

Pkts In

Chars In

Pkts Out Chars Out Punted

Dropped

Lo0

The following is an example of the show pxf accounting interface command with sample output:

Router# show pxf accounting POS4/0

Interface

POS4/0

Pkts In

Chars In

1064

Pkts Out Chars Out

Punted

Using the show pxf crash Command

The following is an example of the show pxf crash command with sample output:

Router# show pxf crash

toaster-uut#sh pxf crash

EX_Type = 0x80000000

EX_ID(b0~3,16~17) = 0x00400

CPU_EX_ID(b0~15) = 0x0004

IHB_EX_Type(b0~5) = 0x00

XRAM0(b0~13) = 0x00000

XRAM1(b0~13) = 0x00000

XRAM2(b0~13) = 0x00000

XRAM3(b0~13) = 0x00000

Pipeline:7FDEFD pdone[3210]:1F 17 17 1D

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

10-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 10 Configuration Tasks and Troubleshooting Information

NSE-1 show Commands

ICM0(b4~13) = 0x00000 ICM1(b4~13) = 0x00000

ICM2(b4~13) = 0x00010 ICM3(b4~13) = 0x00000

LOCK0(b0~4) = 0x00000 LOCK1(b0~4) = 0x00000

LOCK2(b0~4) = 0x00000 LOCK3(b0~4) = 0x00000

CPU0/2: SW EX Type=0x00000000 LBUS EX Type=0x00000081 HW EX

Type=0x00000400

CPU:row=0x0 column=0x2 cpu=0x2

PC:0000098E LR:0000087F CR:002C4C00

r0:00000000 r1:8001CEA0 r2:80784390 r3:00000000

r4:00005400 r5:80D3BA04 r6:80A7CA00 r7:00000004

r8:00000000 r9:00000008 r10:80092324 r11:800A6200

r12:00000033 r13:00000008 r14:00000000 r15:00000000

misr1a:00000000 misr1bhi:00000000 misr1blo:00000000 misr2hi:00000000

misr2lo:00000000 reserve:00000000 reserve:00000000 reserve:00000000

sisr1a:01000040

sisr1b:00000000

irhi:4402200F

irlo:00000000

cAll:C20DE822 DCD1:00020400 DCD2:00000002 CNTL:00000000

TBuf intr 0:1111111F

TBuf intr 1:020FFFF0

TBuf intr 2:00003C80

TBuf intr 3:80000000

TBuf intr 4:00000400

Xram return:00000000

Icram return hi:80024E00

Icram return lo:800A4E00

TBuf addr 0:005E6800 TBuf sblock1 0:8078A374 TBuf sblock0 0:804FD600

TBuf addr 1:005E6800 TBuf sblock1 1:8078A374 TBuf sblock0 1:804FD600

TBuf addr 2:005E6800 TBuf sblock1 2:8078A374 TBuf sblock0 2:804FD600

TBuf addr 3:005E6800 TBuf sblock1 3:8078A374 TBuf sblock0 3:804FD600

TBuf addr 4:005E6800 TBuf sblock1 4:8078A374 TBuf sblock0 4:804FD600

TBuf addr 5:005E6800 TBuf sblock1 5:8078A374 TBuf sblock0 5:804FD600

TBuf addr 6:005E6800 TBuf sblock1 6:8078A374 TBuf sblock0 6:804FD600

TBuf addr 7:005E6800 TBuf sblock1 7:8078A374 TBuf sblock0 7:804FD600

Using the show pxf info Command

The following is an example of the show pxf info command with sample output:

Router# show pxf info

pxf:tmc type TMC ASIC Pass1 (no ECC) revision 3

ucode:filename 'system:pxf/ucode0' revision 1.1

state: is running, number of starts 1

uptime:15:24:18

Memory Configuration:

Bank Name

Total

16 Kb

32 Mb

16 Kb

32 Mb

16 Kb

32 Mb

16 Kb

32 Mb

Reserved

10 Kb

26 Mb

512 bytes

669 Kb

6656 bytes

441 Kb

In-use

0 bytes

16 Kb

0 bytes

2015 Kb

0 bytes

800 Kb

0 bytes

128 Kb

Free

tmc internal memory column 0

tmc column 0 memory bank 0

tmc internal memory column 1

tmc column 1 memory bank 0

tmc internal memory column 2

tmc column 2 memory bank 0

tmc internal memory column 3

tmc column 3 memory bank 0

6144 bytes

5554 Kb

15 Kb

29 Mb

9728 bytes

30 Mb

15 Kb

2092 Kb

512 bytes

29 Mb

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

10-8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 10 Configuration Tasks and Troubleshooting Information

NSE-1 show Commands

Using the show pxf interface Command

The show pxf interface command provides a summary of the interfaces in the router and which PXF

features or capabilities are enabled on these interfaces. The following is an example of the

show pxf interface command:

Router# show pxf interface

Intf I/f # Attributes

Fa0/0

Et1/0

Et1/1

Et1/2

Et1/3

Se2/0

Se2/1

Se2/2

Se2/3

Fa3/0

PO4/0

AT5/0

Raw, Encap, QoS(Cr 0, Thrsh 2, Max 101)

Raw, Encap

Raw, Encap, QoS(Cr 0, Thrsh 2, Max 13)

Raw, Encap

Raw, Encap, QoS(Cr 0, Thrsh 2, Max 5)

Raw, Encap

Using the show pxf feature ? Command and Subcommands

The following is an example of the feature-specific show pxf feature ? command with sample output:

Router# show pxf feature ?

cef PXF CEF info

nat PXF NAT info

•

show pxf feature cef ?

display pxf entry

Router# show pxf feature cef entry

Shadow 16-4-4-8 PXF Mtrie:

41 leaves, 1968 leaf bytes, 15 nodes, 267000 node bytes

5 invalidations

46 prefix updates

refcounts: 66746 leaf, 66720 node

Prefix/Length

Refcount

Parent

0.0.0.0/0

62282

0.0.0.0/32

0.0.0.0/0

171.69.12.128/27

171.69.12.128/32

171.69.12.129/32

171.69.12.130/32

171.69.12.131/32

171.69.12.132/32

171.69.12.138/32

171.69.12.139/32

171.69.12.140/32

171.69.12.141/32

171.69.12.142/32

171.69.12.143/32

171.69.12.145/32

171.69.12.146/32

171.69.12.147/32

171.69.12.128/27

(display text omitted)

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

10-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 10 Configuration Tasks and Troubleshooting Information

NSE-1 Error Messages

•

show pxf feature nat ?

Router# show pxf feature nat ?

entry toaster nat entry

stat

tcp

toaster nat processing info

toaster nat tcp logging info

Router# show pxf feature nat entry

--- 171.69.12.175

--- 171.69.12.161

--- 171.69.12.162

--- 171.69.12.163

--- 171.69.12.164

--- 171.69.12.165

--- 171.69.12.166

192.168.0.129

192.168.0.7

192.168.0.2

192.168.0.3

192.168.0.4

192.168.0.13

192.168.0.5

---

Router# show pxf feature nat stat

NAT translation processing information

total nat entries = 0x1000, entries (used, free) = (0x7, 0xFF9)

untranslated flows:0x7022D

translated flows:0x1030

icmp extendable flows:0x0

noop alloc miss:0x0

entry alloc miss:0x0

entry delete miss:0x0

NSE-1 Error Messages

If the PXF processor crashes or hangs, check the syslog for any error messages.

You may see error messages similar to the following messages.

•

PXF processor crash and error message:

WARNING:PXF Exception:mac_xid=0x10000

*** IHB watchdog timer expired

6d16h:%PXF-2-EXCEPTION:pxf exception on pxf tmc.

Workaround: Run the show pxf crash command to obtain more information.

•

PXF processor hang and error message:

WARNING:PXF Exception:mac_xid=0x8

*** External Memory Column 3 exception, type = 20

If you see this error message, the PXF processor has been left in HALT state. During bootup, the

PXF processor is in error state and cannot be brought up.

Workaround: Reboot the router.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

10-10

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 10 Configuration Tasks and Troubleshooting Information

Using Debugging Commands and PXF

•

PXF processor crash and error message:

00:49:37:Fatal pxf interrupt, int_reg=0x80, int_mask=0xFFFF, config=0x1FF40

00:49:37:-Traceback= 6055B9CC 60530D10

This message indicates the PXF processor encountered a serious error and crashed.

Workaround: Reboot the router.

Note

The most current product documentation is online. For information on accessing documentation, see

“Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request” section on page iv.

Using Debugging Commands and PXF

To enable all normal Cisco IOS packet debugging facilities, disable PXF. In configuration mode, use the

no ip pxf command:

hostname (config)# no ip pxf

Then use the Cisco IOS debugging commands to troubleshoot the problem.

Note

The most current product documentation is online. For information on accessing documentation, see

“Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request” section on page iv.

PXF Troubleshooting Information

Use the information in this section to troubleshoot PXF problems.

Cisco IOS Statistics Not Supported by PXF

Some standard Cisco IOS statistics are not supported in the PXF path, including:

•

Subinterface counters

ATM VC counters

Class-match statistics on classes with neither policing nor class-based weighted fair queueing

(CBWFQ)

Features Not Supported by PXF

Features that are not supported by PXF are punted to the Route Processor (RP), which can cause high

RP CPU usage.

High PXF CPU Usage

Enter the show pxf accounting summary command to display information about PXF CPU usage:

Router# show pxf accounting summary

10 second averages: PXF complex busy: 1% PXF read pipeline full: 0%

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

10-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 10 Configuration Tasks and Troubleshooting Information

PXF Troubleshooting Information

The PXF has 16 processors, only one of which is in use at a time when there is a low traffic rate. Even

though only one of the processors is working, all of the PXF processors are slightly slowed. At higher

traffic rates many of the PXF processors are working at the same time, but there is no additional slow

down.

High Route Processor CPU Usage

High RP CPU usage may result from punting of packets from the PXF processors to the RP. Enter the

show pxf accounting summary command to view the number and cause of punts.

Router# show pxf accounting summary

Pkts

Dropped

Total

RP Processed

Ignored

48360

PXF Statistic:

Packets RP -> PXF:

switch ip:

switch raw:

qos fastsend:

qos enqueue:

Total:

30048360

1938

30050298

Packets PXF -> RP:

qos pkts:

1938

fast pkts:

30000000

drops:total

punts:total

48360

not IP

CEF no adjacency :

40572

7788

Total:

30050298

Packets ignored:

shadow ring full:

in ring full:

ring space:

shadow ring:

16384

968

inring:

PXF inactive:

tx credits:

holdq enqueues:

interrupts:

interrupt packets:

pending read bytes:

16230330

delayed credits:

requeue drops:

interrupt misses:

40538

53326

1947

Interface

Fa0/0

Et1/0

Et1/1

Et1/2

Et1/3

Se2/0

Se2/1

Se2/2

Se2/3

Fa3/0

PO4/0

AT5/0

Vi1

Pkts In

Chars In

Pkts Out Chars Out

30000000 1740000000

Punted

970

21309

Dropped

963

30000000 1440000000

963

23192

Vt1

Vi2

Vt2

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

10-12

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 10 Configuration Tasks and Troubleshooting Information

PXF Troubleshooting Information

Note

CPU usage becomes more efficient as packet load increases. For example, if you are running at 60

percent CPU with only 33 percent of customer load on the system, this does not mean that you need 180

percent CPU for 100 percent of customers. Part of the original 60 percent CPU usage is overhead usage,

which does not increase as packet load increases.

Ignored Packets

Packet ignores on an interface may result from high CPU usage. Enter the show interfaces command to

display any input ignores:

Router# show interfaces ethernet 0/0

Ethernet0/0 is up, line protocol is up

...

21 input errors, 0 CRC, 0 frame, 0 overrun, 21 ignored

Packets are ignored if there is no available CPU to accept the new packets. This can happen if the router

is overloaded with traffic, but can also happen if the interface is faulty. If ignores are present on all

interfaces, then the router is probably overloaded with traffic, or does not have sufficient free buffers in

the pool that match the maximum transmission unit (MTU) on interfaces. In the latter case, an increment

of the ignored counter is followed by an increment of the no buffer counter:

Router# show interfaces serial 0/0

...

1567 packets input, 0 bytes, 22 no buffer

22 input errors, 0 CRC, 0 frame, 0 overrun, 22 ignored, 0 abort

No Buffers

If there are too many buffers configured for the output hold queue on an interface, this can use memory

and result in dropped input packets. Enter the show running-config command and the show interfaces

command to display the status of the incoming packet interfaces.

Priority and Policing Configured in the Class Policy

PXF does not support a configured priority and policing in the same class of a policy.

PXF Punts

If a feature that is supported in the PXF path appears not to be working, it could be the result of PXF

failing to punt packets when it should. If you have only particular interfaces running the feature, you can

configure a feature that PXF does not support on that interface to force PXF to punt packets.

QoS Fast-send and QoS Enqueue

PXF is responsible for managing the outbound traffic queues on an interface on which output QoS

queueing is configured. All traffic destined for this interface must be processed by PXF, including both

keepalive packets that originate in the router, known as QoS Fast-send packets, and packets that are

switched in Cisco IOS, known as QoS Enqueue packets. If there is excessive traffic on the QoS Enqueue

or on the QoS Fast-send path, QoS functionality can be disrupted. Use the show pxf accounting

summary feature to display the QoS Fast-send and QoS Enqueue packets:

Router# show pxf accounting summary

qos fastsend:

qos enqueue:

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

10-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 10 Configuration Tasks and Troubleshooting Information

Removing and Replacing an AC-Input or DC-Input Power Supply

WFQ Queues

When there is an increase in ignored packets and in the no buffer count, it is possible that the output

weighted fair queueing (WFQ) queues are too long. To specify the number of dynamic queues to be

reserved for use by the class-default class as part of the default class policy, use the fair-queue

policy-map class configuration command; for example:

policy-map policy9

class class-default

fair-queue 16

queue-limit 20

Removing and Replacing an AC-Input or DC-Input Power Supply

The weight of power supplies installed in a Cisco 7200 series router or Cisco 7200 VXR router might

make it difficult for you to pull the network processing engine from its chassis slot. If this is the case,

first remove the installed power supplies from the chassis, and then remove the network processing

engine. The following sections explain how to remove and replace an AC-input or a DC-input power

supply in a Cisco 7200 series router.

Note

The network processing engine is installed above the power supplies in a Cisco uBR7200 series router.

You do not need to remove the power supplies from a Cisco uBR7200 series router to pull the network

processing engine from its chassis slot.

Caution

Do not mix AC-input and DC-input power supplies in the same router.

Removing a Power Supply from a Cisco 7200 Series Router

The steps for removing an AC-input and DC-input power supply from a Cisco 7200 series router are the

same. The two power supplies share the same dimensions and faceplates, except for the AC-input

receptacle on the AC-input power supply and the DC-input lead receptacles on the DC-input power

supply.

To remove an AC-input or DC-input power supply from a Cisco 7200 series router, complete the

following steps:

Step 1

Ensure that the power switch on the power supply is in the off (O) position and input power is

disconnected from the power supply and its power source. (See the “Removing and Replacing the NPE

or NSE” section on page 9-2.)

Note

When powering off the router, wait a minimum of 30 seconds before powering it on again.

Step 2

Using a number 2 Phillips or a 3/16-inch flat-blade screwdriver, loosen the two captive installation

screws on the faceplate of the power supply. (See Figure 10-1.)

If the router is not installed in a standard 19-inch, 4-post rack or in a telco-type rack, skip to Step 6. If

the router is installed in a rack, determine if any permanent rack fixtures, such as a power strip, are

obstructing access to the power supply. If a rack fixture is obstructing access to the power supply,

proceed to Step 3.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

10-14

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 10 Configuration Tasks and Troubleshooting Information

Removing and Replacing an AC-Input or DC-Input Power Supply

Figure 10-1

Power Supply Captive Installation Screws and Handle—Cisco 7200 Series AC-Input

Power Supply Shown

Captive installation screw

Handle

Step 3

Using a 3/16-inch flat-blade screwdriver, loosen the screws that secure the router to the front mounting

strips of the rack.

Step 4

Step 5

Position at least one person in front of the rack to support the front underside of the router.

From the rear of the rack, carefully push the front of the router out of the rack until there is enough

clearance to remove the power supply.

Step 6

Grasp the power supply handle and pull the power supply from the router.

Caution

To maintain agency compliance requirements and meet EMI emissions standards for the Cisco 7200

series chassis with a single power supply, the power supply filler plate must remain in the power supply

adjacent to the installed power supply. Do not remove this filler plate from the router unless you intend

to install a redundant power supply.

Step 7

Repeat Step 1 through Step 6 for the other installed power supply (if present).

This completes the procedure for removing an AC-input or DC-input power supply from a Cisco 7200

series router.

Replacing a Power Supply in a Cisco 7200 Series Router

To install a new AC-input or DC-input power supply in a Cisco 7200 series router, complete the

following steps:

Step 1

Step 2

Make sure that the power switch on the power supply is in the off (O) position.

Grasp the power supply handle with one hand and place your other hand underneath the power supply

for support. (See Figure 10-2.)

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

10-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 10 Configuration Tasks and Troubleshooting Information

Removing and Replacing an AC-Input or DC-Input Power Supply

Figure 10-2

Holding the Power Supply—Cisco 7200 Series AC-Input Power Supply Shown

Step 3

Step 4

Align the power supply to the power supply bay.

Slide the power supply completely into the power supply bay until its faceplate is flush with the router’s

rear panel.

Caution

Step 5

When inserting a power supply into the router, do not use unnecessary force; slamming the power supply

into the bay can damage the connectors on the rear of the supply and on the midplane.

Seat the power supply in the router by tightening its captive installation screws with a number 2 Phillips

or a 3/16-inch flat-blade screwdriver.

Note

The power supply is not fully seated in the router midplane until you tighten its captive

installation screws (use a number 2 Phillips or a 3/16-inch flat-blade screwdriver).

Step 6

Step 7

Repeat Step 1 through Step 5 for a second power supply (if present).

If there is no second power supply, replace the filler plate on the empty power supply bay. Using a

number 2 Phillips or a 3/16-inch flat-blade screwdriver, tighten the filler plate’s captive installation

screws.

Step 8

Step 9

If you pushed the router from the rack, slowly guide the router back into the rack.

Use a 3/16-inch flat-blade screwdriver to tighten the screws that secure the router to the front mounting

strips of the rack.

Note

When powering on the router, wait a minimum of 30 seconds before powering it off again.

This completes the procedures for replacing an AC-input or DC-input power supply in a Cisco 7200

series router.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

10-16

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 10 Configuration Tasks and Troubleshooting Information

Fiber Optic Cleaning Information

Caution

To maintain agency compliance requirements and meet EMI emissions standards for the Cisco 7200

series routers with a single power supply, the power supply filler plate must remain in the power supply

adjacent to the installed power supply. Do not remove this filler plate from the router unless you intend

to install a redundant power supply.

Fiber Optic Cleaning Information

We strongly recommend cleaning all optical connections before reconnecting any optical cables to

equipment. For information about cleaning optical connectors, see the Inspection and Cleaning

Procedures for Fiber-Optic Connections document and the Compressed Air Cleaning Issues for

Fiber-Optic Connections document.

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

10-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 10 Configuration Tasks and Troubleshooting Information

Fiber Optic Cleaning Information

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

10-18

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

I N D E X

CompactFlash Disk specifications 6-12

configurations

Bable Management Bracket

CWDM SFP module 6-19

4-post Rack 7-34

Configuring Interface Transmission and Speed Modes

NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 7-57

CWDM GBIC Options 5-15

CWDM SFP module configuration for the NPE-G2 6-19

Cable Management Bracket

How to Install 7-35

Cable-management Brackets

NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 7-29

Cables

DIMMs, installing

NPE-175, NPE-225, NPE-300, NSE-1 9-14

Disconnecting AC-input power 9-4

AC Power 7-35

AC power 9-24

Class 1 Laser Product 7-21

Cleaning Information for Fiber Optic Connectors 7-22

Command

Electrical Equipment Guidelines 8-14

Electrostatic Discharge Prevention 8-15

Enabling the Second Processor 7-46

show version 10-4

Commands

show interface stats 7-48

show ip interface 7-48

show mpf cpu 7-49

show mpf cpu history 7-49

show mpf interface 7-50

show mpf ip exact-route 7-51

show mpf punt 7-51

Fiber Optic Cleaning Information 5-20, 7-22

FPGA upgrade, NPE-G2 only 7-67

show rom-monitor 7-64

show version 7-51

GBIC installation procedures

NPE-G1 7-23

upgrade rom-monitor, NPE-G1 only 7-64

commands

GBIC Power Requirements and Power Budget 5-16

rommon CLI showmon 7-64

CompactFlash Disk, NPE-G1 or NPE-G2 installation

procedures 7-19

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

IN-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

Installing and Removig a CompactFlash Disk 6-7

Installing DIMMs

NPE-175, NPE-225, NPE-300, NSE-1 9-14

ip mpf command 7-47

LEDs

I/O 5-4

Mode-Conditioning Patch Cord Description 5-16

Native Gigabit Ethernet interfaces

Changing Media type on the NPE-G1 or

NPE-G2 7-56

Network Processing Engine

System Management Functions 2-4, 3-4

NPE, Router, and Port Adapter Compatability

requirements 8-3

NPE-100

Components 1-4

Memory Configurations 1-7

Memory Specifications 1-7

System Manaement Functions 1-5

NPE-100, NPE-150, and NPE-200 Description and

Overview 1-1

NPE-150

components 1-4

Memory Configurations

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

IN-2

Index

Replacing SODIMMs 7-26

installing a USB Flash memory module or

etoken 7-19

Resetting the Interface 7-58

Interfaces 6-4

ROMmon upgrade Error Messages 7-66

Running Configuration File 5-1

Specifications 5-9

LEDs 6-4

Memory Configurations 6-12

Memory Specifications 6-12

Port Adapter Jacket Card support 8-4

Running Configuration File 6-1

Software Image Name 6-2, 8-4, 10-2

Specifications 6-11

Speed Modes, Configuring 7-57

Summary 5-7

Supported Platforms 5-1

System Management Functions 5-8

Troubleshooting the LINK LED 10-3

Troubleshooting the POWER ON LED 10-3

Troubleshooting the SLOT ACTIVE LED 10-3

Upgrading ROMmon 7-64

Summary 6-9

Supported Platforms 6-1

System Management Functions 6-10

upgrading FPGA 7-67

Upgrading the Boot Helper or Boot Loader

Image 7-62

NPE or NSE

NPE-G1 Description and Overview 5-2

NPE-G1 or NPE-G2

Installation Procedures 9-1

Show Commands 10-4

Torubleshooting 10-4

Auxiliary Port Information 7-56

Changing Preferences, ROMmon 7-65

NSE-1

changing the media type of the native Gigabit Ethernet

ports 7-56

Configuration tasks 10-1

Error messages 10-10

Clearing Counters 7-59

Memory Configurations 4-5

show commands 10-6

Configuring Native Gigabit Ethernet Interfaces 7-56

Copying the Cnfiguration File 7-4

NSE-1 and NPEs

Copying the Configuration File to a TFTP Server 7-5

Installation proceedures (except NPE-G1) 9-1

NSE-1 Description and Overview 4-1

Copying the Saved Configuration file to

NVRAM 7-52

Debugging 7-58

Installation 7-18

Installation Procedures 7-8

Port Adapter Jacket Card support 8-4

Powering Down the Router 9-3

installing cable-management brackets and

cables 7-29

PXF Troubleshooting Information 10-11

installing the CompactFlash Disk 7-19

Troubleshooting 10-2

NPE-G2

Bandwidth Requirements 6-3

Components 6-3

Reconnecting AC-Input Power to the Cisco uBR7225 VXR

Router 7-38

CWDM SFP module configuration 6-19

Description and Overview 6-2

Removing an NPE or NSE (except NPE-G1) 9-2

Removing the NPE or NSE 9-9

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

IN-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

RJ-45 Port Pinout 6-14

specifications

CompactFlash Disk 6-12

USB Flash memory module 6-13

RJ-45 Port Pinouts 5-11

ROMmon, NPE-G1 or NPE-G2

Changing Preferences 7-65

ROM Monitor 7-64

ROMmon upgrade error messages for the NPE-G1 7-66

Telephone Wiring Guidelines 8-14

Terms and Acronyms 1-5, 2-4, 3-4, 4-3, 5-8, 6-10

Tools and Equipment 8-1

Safety Guidelines 8-4

SFP Port Connections, NPE-G2 6-16

show Commands

Troubleshooting NPE-100 through NPE-400 10-4

show interface stats 7-48

show mpf cpu history 7-49

show mpf interface 7-50

show mpf ip exact-route 7-51

show commands

upgrade rom-monitor command, NPE-G1 only 7-64

upgrading FPGA, NPE-G2 only 7-67

Upgrading ROMmon, NPE-G1 only 7-64

USB Flash memory module or etoken , installing in an

NPE-G2 7-19

show ip interface 7-48

show mpf cpu 7-49

show mpf punt 7-51

show rom-monitor 7-64

show version 7-51

USB Flash memory module specifications 6-13

USB Memory Modules or eTokens 6-8

Using the show c7200 Command 10-5

SIMMs, installing

NPE-100, NPE-150, NPE-200 9-13

SIMMs, removing

NPE-100, NPE-150, NPE-200 9-11

SNMP Management 1-5, 2-4, 3-4

SODIMMs

NPE-G1 7-26

Software requirements

NPE-100 8-5

NPE-150 8-5

NPE-175 8-7

NPE-200 8-5

NPE-225 8-7

NPE-300 8-5

NSE-1 8-7

Specifications

I/O Controller blank panel 6-13

Network Processing Engine and Network Services Engine Installation and Configuration

OL-4448-12

IN-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Belkin Computer Keyboard F8E849 BNDL User Manual
Blanco Indoor Furnishings 157 069 User Manual
Bosch Power Tools Grinder 1974 8D User Manual
Brother Sewing Machine 885 U01 User Manual
Cabletron Systems Switch 6A000 User Manual
Cadco Convection Oven OST 34A User Manual
Canon Projector 7545 User Manual
Casio Barcode Reader DT 800RF User Manual
Cerwin Vega Car Amplifier CV 1800 User Manual
Chief Manufacturing Stud Sensor CTA 111 User Manual